2020 Nissan NV Passenger Bus Owner's Manual and ...

2020 NV PASSENGEROWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGWARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passengervehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you tochemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoidbreathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated areaand wear gloves or wash your hands frequently whenservicing your vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-derstand the operation and maintenanceof your vehicle so that you may enjoy manymiles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.Please read through this manual beforeoperating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-let explains details about the warrantiescovering your vehicle. The “Maintenanceand schedules” section of this manualexplains details about maintaining andservicing your vehicle. Additionally, aseparate Customer Care/Lemon LawBooklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-solve any concerns you may have withyour vehicle, as well as clarify your rightsunder your state’s lemon law.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or haveany questions, they will be glad to assistyou with the extensive resources availableto them.

In addition to factory-installed options,your vehicle may also be equipped withadditional accessories installed prior to de-livery. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your ve-hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,warnings, cautions and instructions con-cerning proper use of such accessoriesprior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-cessory. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your ve-hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensurefamiliarity with controls and maintenancerequirements assisting you in the safe op-eration of your vehicle.

WARNINGIMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast forconditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention todriving and avoid using vehicle fea-tures or taking other actions thatcould distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-propriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in therear seat.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information aboutthe proper use of vehicle safety fea-tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver dif-ferently from an ordinary passenger ve-hicle because it has a higher center ofgravity. As with other vehicles with fea-tures of this type, failure to operate thisvehicle correctly may result in loss of con-trol or an accident.Be sure to read “Driving precautions” and“Avoiding collision and rollover” in the“Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNINGAny modifications or alterations of thisvehicle that do not comply with theNISSAN NV 1500/2500/3500 BodyBuilders Guide may affect the safety ofthe vehicle which may result in a colli-sion, serious personal injury or death.An electronic copy of the NISSAN BodyBuilders Guide is available atwww.nissancommercialvehicles.com.

Modifications made to this vehicle byconversion companies or dealers mayaffect the final certification of theengine, vehicle or equipment. The con-version company or dealer has the re-sponsibility to certify that the alteredvehicle and equipment complies orcontinues to comply with all applicablemotor vehicle safety standards andemissions regulations. The conversioncompany or dealer is responsible formaking sure the modifications or in-stalled equipment does not affect thesafety of the vehicle.

NISSAN does not assume the responsi-bility as the final stage manufacturerfor modified or altered vehicles.NISSAN is not responsible for the finalcertification, product liability claims, orwarranty claims, resulting from anycomponent,assembly,or system beingaltered. NISSAN is not responsible formodifications which cause the vehicleto become non-compliant with any ofthe motor vehicle safety standards,emissions regulations, or modifica-tions that cause the vehicle to be or be-come defective or unsafe.

Your vehicle’s warranty may not coverdamage resulting from alterations,modifications, installation of non-approved accessories, or improper in-stallation of accessories.For additionalinformation, refer to your 2020 NV1500/2500/3500 Warranty Informa-tion Booklet for complete details.

WARNINGInstalling an aftermarket On-Board Di-agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that usesthe port during normal driving, for ex-ample remote insurance companymonitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,telematics or engine reprogramming,may cause interference or damage tovehicle systems. We do not recommendor endorse the use of any aftermarketOBD plug-in devices, unless specificallyapproved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-ranty may not cover damage caused byany aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for allfeatures and equipment available on thismodel. Features and equipment in your ve-hicle may vary depending on model, trimlevel, options selected, order, date of pro-duction, region or availability. Therefore,you may find information about features orequipment that are not included or in-stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect atthe time of printing. NISSAN reserves theright to change specifications, perfor-mance, design or component supplierswithout notice and without obligation.From time to time, NISSAN may update orrevise this manual to provide Owners withthe most accurate information currentlyavailable. Please carefully read and retainwith this manual all revision updates sentto you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and anyupdates can also be found in the Ownersection of the NISSAN website athttps://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you havequestions concerning any information inyour Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN

Consumer Affairs. For contact information,refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNINGThis is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause death or seri-ous personal injury. To avoid or reducethe risk, the procedures must be fol-lowed precisely.

CAUTIONThis is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damage toyour vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,the procedures must be followedcarefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in anillustration, it means the arrow points tothe front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese call attention to an item in the illus-tration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-teries, may contain perchlorate material.The following advisory is provided: “Per-chlorate Material – special handling mayapply. For additional information, referto www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is atrademark ownedby Bluetooth SIG,Inc. and licensedto Panasonic andBosch.

SiriusXM® servicesrequire asubscription aftertrial period and aresold separately oras a package. Thesatellite service isavailable only inthe 48 contiguousUSA and DC.SiriusXM® satelliteservice is alsoavailable inCanada; seewww.siriusxm.ca.

© 2019 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted in anyform, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-erwise, without the prior written permis-sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and yourNISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and serviceneeds.However, if there is something that yourNISSAN dealer cannot assist you with oryou would like to provide NISSAN directlywith comments or questions, please con-tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers877–NIS-NCV1(877-647-6281)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will askfor the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephonenumber

– Vehicle identification number (attachedto the top of the instrument panel on thedriver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-tion at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003or via e-mail at:[email protected]

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5or via e-mail at:[email protected]

If you prefer, visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

1. Head restraints/headrests(2nd, 3rd and 4th rows) (P. 1-15)

2. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system (second rowshown; 3rd and 4th rows similar)(P. 1-32)

3. Head restraints/headrests(front row) (P. 1-15)

4. Front seat belts (P. 1-21, 1-55)5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag(P. 1-55)

6. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-55)7. Front seats (P. 1-2)8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-55)9. Top tether strap anchor points

(2nd, 3rd, and 4th rows — found onbottom of seatback) (2nd rowshown; other rows similar) (P. 1-32)

10. Rear seat configurations (P. 1-2)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LII2319

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-12)2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-29)3. Windshield (P. 8-21)4. Power windows (P. 2-50)5. Door locks (P. 3-3)

Key fob (P. 3-9)Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-16)7. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)

Flat tire (P. 6-2)Tire chains (P. 8-34)

8. Headlight and turn signal switch(P. 2-31)Daytime Running Lights (DRL)system (P. 2-31)Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-34)

Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LIC3702

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear window and outside mirror(if so equipped) defroster switch(P. 2-30)

2. Trailer hitch/towing (P. 10-17)3. Rearview monitor (P. 4-16)4. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)5. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-12)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)Fuel-filler door (P. 3-12)

6. Vehicle loading (P. 10-14)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LIC3774

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Map lights (P. 2-52)2. Sun visors (P. 3-16)3. Inside mirror (P. 3-16)4. Steering wheel (P. 3-15)5. Glove box (P. 2-42)6. Console box (if so equipped)

(P. 2-42)7. Cup holders (mounted to lower

seat frame) (2nd row shown; 3rdand 4th rows similar) (P. 2-48)

8. Rear seat configurations (P. 1-2)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LII2528

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Headlight switch (P. 2-31)2. Vents (P. 4-23)3. Front fog light switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-31)4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-29)

Headlight and turn signal switch(P. 2-31)

5. Steering wheel switch for audiocontrol (P. 4-73)Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem (P. 4-76, 4-95)

6. Driver supplemental air bag(P. 1-55)Horn (P. 2-34)

7. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)Warning and indicator lights(P. 2-18)

8. Cruise control switches (P. 5-18)9. Shift lever (P. 5-12)10. Storage tray (P. 2-42)11. Audio system controls (P. 4-37)

Navigation system*(if so equipped) (P. 4-10)

12. Storage tray (P. 2-43)13. Supplemental air bag (P. 1-55)14. Glove box (P. 2-44)15. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)16. Climate controls (P. 4-24)LII2650

INSTRUMENT PANEL


17. Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)Front and rear sonar system OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)Power inverter switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-36)Heated seat switches(if so equipped) (P. 2-34)Tow mode switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-38)USB connection port (P. 4-57)AUX IN jack (P. 4-57)

18. 12v power outlet (P. 2-39)19. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)20. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-15)21. Hood release switch (P. 3-12)22. Fuse box (P. 8-23)23. Outside power mirror switch

(P. 3-16)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-35)

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).



VQ40DE engine1. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-23)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)5. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)7. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)8. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)9. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)10. Battery (P. 8-15)11. Radiator cap (P. 8-6)12. Fuse/Relay box (P. 8-23)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LDI3335

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


VK56VD engine1. Radiator cap (P. 8-6)2. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-23)3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)6. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)7. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)8. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-6)9. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)10. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)11. Battery (P. 8-15)12. Fuse/Relay box (P. 8-23)

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.


LDI3329


Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

2-19

Automatic Trans-mission checkwarning light

2-19

Automatic Trans-mission oil tem-perature warninglight

2-19

or

Brake warninglight

2-19

Charge warninglight

2-20

Warninglight

Name Page

Door open warn-ing light

2-20

Driver’s seat beltwarning light andchime

2-20

Engine oil pres-sure warning light

2-20

Low fuel warninglight and chime

2-21

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-21

Low windshield-washer fluidwarning light (if soequipped)

2-23

Master warninglight

2-23

Warninglight

Name Page

Passenger’s seatbelt warning light

2-23

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-23

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatic Trans-mission positionindicator light

2-24

CRUISE indicatorlight

2-24

High beam indi-cator light (blue)

2-24

Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL)

2-24

Security indicatorlight (if soequipped)

2-25

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS


Indicatorlight

Name Page

SET indicator light 2-25

Slip indicator light 2-25

TOW mode ONindicator light(if so equipped)

2-25

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

2-25

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFFindicator light

2-25


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment (forpassenger’s seat and if so equipped fordriver’s seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Armrests (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Removing the 2nd, 3rd and 4th rowseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Installing the 2nd, 3rd and 4th rowseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Seat rail covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Seat configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Adjustable head restraint/headrestcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Three-point type seat belt withretractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Rear-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38Rear-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-55Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-66Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-66

WARNING∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback and upright in the seat with bothfeet on the floor and adjust the seatproperly. For additional information,refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in theseat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls ormake the vehicle move. Unattendedchildren could become involved in se-rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, do notleave children, people who require theassistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation. The seat maymove suddenly and could cause lossof control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort.Seat belts are most effective when thepassenger sits well back and straightup in the seat. If the seatback is re-clined, the risk of sliding under the lapbelt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTIONWhen adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (for passenger’sseat and if so equipped fordriver’s seat)Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-ally. For additional information about ad-justing the seats, refer to the steps outlinedin this section.

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slidethe seat forward or backward to the de-sired position. Release the lever to lock theseat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever upand lean back. To bring the seatback for-ward, pull the lever up and lean your bodyforward. Release the lever to lock the seat-back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Precautions on seat beltusage” in this section. Also, the seatback

LRS2038 LRS2039

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

can be reclined to allow occupants to restwhen the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is in the P (Park) position.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT(if so equipped for driver’s seat)Operating tips

∙ The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If themotor stops during operation, wait30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switchfor a long period of time when the en-gine is off. This will discharge the bat-tery.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch as shown will slide theseat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch as shown until thedesired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Precautions on seat beltusage” in this section. Also, the seatback

LRS2029


can be reclined to allow occupants to restwhen the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is in P (Park).

Seat lifterMove the switch as shown to adjust theangle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar supportThe lumbar support feature provides ad-justable lower back support to the driver.Turn the knob forward or backward to ad-just the seat lumbar area.

LRS2030 LRS2040


ARMRESTS (if so equipped)To use the armrests, pull them down to theresting position.

�A Stowed position

�B Resting position

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-eryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

∙ Head restraints/headrests should beadjusted properly as they may pro-vide significant protection against in-jury in an accident. Always replacethem properly if they have been re-moved for any reason.

∙ If the head restraints/headrests areremoved for any reason, they shouldbe securely stored to prevent themfrom causing injury to passengers ordamage to the vehicle in case of sud-den braking or an accident.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched po-sition. If they are not completely se-cured, passengers may be injured inan accident or sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

∙ Do not drive the vehicle unless all ofthe seats are installed and locked inposition. Loose seats can becomeprojectiles in a sudden stop or colli-sion and cause serious personal in-jury or death.

LRS2041


Folding the front passenger’sseatbackTo fold the front passenger’s seatback flatfor extra storage length when transportinglong items:

1. Slide the seat to the rearmost position.Lift up on the recline lever, located onthe outside edge of the seat, and allowthe seatback to fold forward as far as itwill go.

2. Once the seatback is released, it willenable you to fold the front passengerseatback flat over the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat toa seating position, lift up on the seat-back and push it up to an upright posi-tion. Then pull up on the recline leverand lean the seatback to a proper seat-ing position. Release the lever to lockthe seatback in position.

WARNING∙ If you fold the front passenger’s seat-

back flat forward to carry longer ob-jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-cured and not near an air bag. In acrash, an inflating air bag might forcethat object toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away from thearea in which an air bag would inflate.For additional information, refer to“Precautions on SRS” in this section.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area or on the front passenger’sseat when it is in the fold-down posi-tion. Use of these areas by passengerscould result in serious injury or deathin an accident or sudden stop.

CAUTIONDo not apply a load to the back of thetable if it is not fully horizontal. Doing somay cause deformation/malfunction.

NOTE:

The belt buckle must be in the forward-most position for the seat to be folded toavoid premature aging.

LRS2042 LRS2034


REMOVING THE 2ND, 3RD AND 4THROW SEATS

WARNING∙ Do not remove or install the seats

while the vehicle is moving.

∙ Do not drive the vehicle unless all ofthe seats are installed and locked inposition. Loose seats can becomeprojectiles in a sudden stop or colli-sion and cause serious personal in-jury or death.

∙ Do not sit in the seats that have beenremoved from the vehicle. The seatsmay tip over and cause personalinjury.

∙ When adjusting or moving the seats inyour vehicle, do not use any of theseat belt buckles, tongues or webbingto carry or move the seats. Lifting theseats by any of the seat belts candamage the seat belts. Damaged seatbelts should be replaced. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. Failure to follow theseinstructions could increase thechance or severity of an injury in a col-lision or sudden stop.

CAUTION∙ Do not drag the seats on the carpet to

prevent damage to the carpet.

∙ The seats are heavy. To prevent per-sonal injury, two people should re-move or install the seat.

NOTE:

∙ When removing the 4th row seats, thedriver’s side seat should be removedbefore removing the passenger’s sideseat.

∙ Remove all necessary rail covers beforeremoving or adjusting the seat. 1. Remove the pull strap from the stowed

position.

LRS2102


2. Stand directly behind the seat and pullup and rearward on the straps to dis-engage the seat.

3. Push up and forward to remove theseats from the wells.

4. Rest the seat on the vehicle floor andwith two people, remove the seat fromthe vehicle. Store the seat in a safe lo-cation.

NOTE:

The 4th row seat has rollers on the seatframe to make the seat easier to move toa secure location.

LRS2104 LRS2647 LRS2109


INSTALLING THE 2ND, 3RD AND4TH ROW SEATS

NOTE:

∙ Remove necessary rail covers beforeremoving or adjusting the seat.

∙ The large rail cover should be installedin front of the small rail cover.

1. Make sure the seat mounting locationsare free from objects.

2. Check latches to make sure that theyare in the open position. Pull the pullstrap if the latch is closed.

3. Using two people, bring the seat to theappropriate mounting position.

4. Push up on the rear of the seat. 5. Line up the seat with the mounting lo-cations. Tilt the seat slightly forward sothe front hooks engage into the frontmounting locations.

LRS2647 LRS2129


6. Push up on the rear of the seat so therear latches are 4 inches (100 mm)above the floor. Make sure that thearea beneath the seat is clear. Re-lease the seat so the rear latches dropinto the mounting location and lock.

7. Check front hook and rear latch tomake sure the latches are locked intothe mounting location.

8. Push and pull each seat to make surethe seat is properly engaged. Makesure that the latch indicator does notshow more than 50% red. Pull thestraps and relatch the seats as neces-sary.

9. Stow the pull straps behind the storageclip.

WARNINGFailure to stow the pull straps correctlymay allow the straps to be accidentlypulled (by a person or cargo) releasingthe latch and potentially resulting in in-jury in a crash.

LRS2647Latch indicator

LRS2151 LRS2102


SEAT RAIL COVERSYour vehicle has eight factory installedsmall rail covers. It also comes with a LargeSeat Rail Cover kit. The kit contains fourlarge rail covers that can be used to coverthe seat tracks when the single seats in the2nd and/or 3rd rows have been removed. Ifadditional seats are removed and you wishto cover the seat tracks, contact the PartsDepartment at a NISSAN dealer for the lat-est parts information.

Both the small and large seat rail covers canbe removed and installed the same way.

WARNINGProperly stow the rail covers when notin use. They should be securely storedto prevent them from causing injury topassengers or damage to the vehicle incase of sudden braking or an accident.

Installation of rail coversWhen installing the rail covers into the railopening, make sure that the Owner’sManual symbol is placed in the correct di-rection.

∙ 2nd row towards front of the vehicle

∙ 3rd row towards rear of the vehicle

LRS2123 LRS2124


To install the rail covers:

1. Remove the locking cap from the coverusing a suitable tool, such as a smallscrewdriver or key, before installing thecover in the rail opening.

∙ Rear heater vent (1)

∙ Large rail cover (2)

∙ Small rail cover (3)

2. Clip the large cover into the rail open-ing. Make sure that the Owner’s Manualsymbol is placed in the correct direc-tion. See previous illustration.

3. Slide locking cap back into cover afterclipping into the rail.

LRS2125 LRS2127 LRS2126


Removal of rail coversTo remove the rail covers, remove the lock-ing caps from the cover using a suitabletool such as a small screwdriver or key.Then lift the cover from the rail opening.

WARNINGProperly stow the rail covers when notin use. They should be securely storedto prevent them from causing injury topassengers or damage to the vehicle incase of sudden braking or an accident.

SEAT CONFIGURATIONSThe seating system allows great flexibilityby allowing the 2nd, 3rd and 4th row seatsto be rearranged in multiple configura-tions. Proper usage is important to yoursafety. There is a total of six independentseats in the rear rows and all of them canbe removed and rearranged. The illustra-tion above shows which seats are com-mon and interchangeable.

LRS2125Seats can be interchanged with seats of

the same letter

LRS21132nd and 3rd row passenger side seats

moved to rear positions

LRS2115


The 2nd and 3rd row seats have twofore/aft mounting locations. The rows areidentical and can be interchanged for con-venience. The passenger side seats can bemoved to the rear position independentlyof the driver’s side seats.

WARNINGHead restraints/headrests supplementthe other vehicle safety systems. Theymay provide additional protectionagainst injury in certain rear end colli-sions. Adjustable headrestraints/headrests must be adjustedproperly, as specified in this section.Check the adjustment after someoneelse uses the seat. Do not attach any-thing to the head restraint/headreststalks or remove the headrestraint/headrest. Do not use the seatif the head restraint/headrest has beenremoved. If the head restraint/headrestwas removed, reinstall and properly ad-just the head restraint/headrest beforean occupant uses the seating position.Failure to follow these instructions canreduce the effectiveness of the headrestraints/headrests. This may in-crease the risk of serious injury or deathin a collision.

The illustration shows the seating posi-tions equipped with head restraints/headrests.

� Indicates the seating position isequipped with a head restraint.

� Indicates the seating position is equippedwith a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is notequipped with a head restraint or headrest(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a headrestraint/headrest that may be inte-grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

2nd and 3rd row seats moved to the rearpositions and 4th row removed

LRS2116 LRS2449

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS


∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrestshave multiple notches along the stalk(s)to lock them in a desired adjustmentposition.

∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notchto secure them to the seat frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align thehead restraint/headrest so the cen-ter of your ear is approximately levelwith the center of the headrestraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher thanthe recommended alignment, placethe head restraint/headrest at thehighest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has beenremoved, ensure that it is reinstalledand locked in place before riding in thatdesignated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob(s)

4. Stalks

Type A (if so equipped)LRS2300

Type B (if so equipped)LRS2834


NON-ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTRAINT/HEADRESTCOMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob(s)

4. Stalks

REMOVEUse the following procedure to remove thehead restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up tothe highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob(s).

3. Remove the head restraint/headrestfrom the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrestproperly in a secure place so it is notloose in the vehicle.





5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupantuses the seating position.

INSTALL1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Makesure that the head restraint/headrest isfacing the correct direction. For ve-hicles with Type A, the stalk with thenotch (notches) �1 must be installed inthe hole with the lock knob �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob(s) andpush the head restraint/headrestdown.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses theseating position.





ADJUSTFor adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so thecenter is level with the center of your ears. Ifyour ear position is still higher than therecommended alignment, place the headrestraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob(s) is engagedin the notch (notches) before riding in thatdesignated seating position.

WRS0134Type A (if so equipped)

LRS2351Type B (if so equipped)

LRS2838


RaiseTo raise the head restraint/headrest, pull itup.


LowerTo lower, push and hold the lock knob(s)and push the head restraint/headrestdown.






PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat with both feet on thefloor, your chances of being injured or killedin a collision and/or the severity of injurymay be greatly reduced. NISSAN stronglyencourages you and all of your passengersto buckle up every time you drive, even ifyour seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts beworn at all times when a vehicle is beingdriven.

Type B (if so equipped)LRS2840 SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be in therear seats and in an appropriaterestraint.

WARNING∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do somay reduce the effectiveness of theentire restraint system and increasethe chance or severity of injury in anaccident. Serious injury or death canoccur if the seat belt is not wornproperly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOTTHE WAIST. A lap belt worn too highcould increase the risk of internal inju-ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed and allseat belts fastened, it may indicate amalfunction in the system. Have thesystem checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer.

∙ No changes should be made to theseat belt system. For example, do notmodify the seat belt, add material, orinstall devices that may change theseat belt routing or tension. Doing somay affect the operation of the seatbelt system. Modifying or tamperingwith the seat belt system may resultin serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) haveactivated, they cannot be reused andmust be replaced together with theretractor. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any colli-sion. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.NISSAN recommends that all seat beltassemblies in use during a collision bereplaced unless the collision was mi-nor and the belts show no damageand continue to operate properly.Seat belt assemblies not in use duringa collision should also be inspectedand replaced if either damage or im-proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attachinghardware should be inspected afterany collision. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer’s inspection in-structions and replacement recom-mendations. The child restraintsshould be replaced if they aredamaged.

SSS0014


SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHTBoth the driver’s and passenger’s frontseats are equipped with a seat belt warn-ing light. The warning light, located on theinstrument panel, will show the status ofthe driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warninglight will illuminate for a period of time. Ifthe seat is occupied and seat belt islatched within that period of time, thelight will go out.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat belt shouldbe worn snug and always position the lapbelt as low as possible around the hips, notthe waist. Place the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Never runthe lap/shoulder belt over your abdominalarea. Contact your doctor for specific rec-ommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured personsuse seat belts. Check with your doctor forspecific recommendations.Driver’s seat belt warning light

LRS0786Passenger’s seat belt warning light

LRS2959


THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be in therear seats and in an appropriaterestraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback and upright in the seat with bothfeet on the floor and adjust the seatbelt properly.

∙ Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If theseat belt becomes wrapped around achild’s neck with the ALR mode acti-vated, the child can be seriously in-jured or killed if the seat belt retractsand becomes tight. This can occureven if the vehicle is parked. Unbucklethe seat belt to release the child. If theseat belt cannot be unbuckled or isalready unbuckled, release the childby cutting the seat belt with a suitabletool (such as a knife or scissors) torelease the seat belt. Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2038


Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-tractor and insert the tongue into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage.

∙ The retractor is designed to lockduring a sudden stop or on impact.A slow pulling motion permits theseat belt to move, and allows yousome freedom of movement in theseat.

∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulledfrom its fully retracted position,firmly pull the belt and release it.Then smoothly pull the belt out ofthe retractor.

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)LRS2029 LRS2043


3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion towardthe retractor to take up extra slack. Besure the shoulder belt is routed overyour shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rearseating positions three-point seat belthave two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movementin the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly orduring certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locksthe seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seatbelt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from thebuckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-turns to the ELR mode after the seat beltfully retracts. For additional information, re-fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During nor-mal seat belt use by a passenger, the ALRmode should not be activated. If it is ac-tivated it may cause uncomfortable seatbelt tension.

WARNINGWhen fastening the seat belts, be cer-tain that the seatbacks are completelysecured in the latched position. If theyare not completely secured, passengersmay be injured in an accident or suddenstop.

Unfastening the seat beltsTo unfasten the seat belt, press the buttonon the buckle �1 . The seat belt automati-cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lockseat belt movement by two separatemethods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

LRS2044 WRS0139


To increase your confidence in the seatbelts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-ward quickly. The retractor should lockand restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck, get the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service or to learn more about seat beltoperation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment(front seats)The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you. Foradditional information, refer to “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” in this section. Toadjust, pull out the adjustment button �1and move the shoulder belt anchor to thedesired position �2 , so the belt passes overthe center of the shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Release the ad-justment button to lock the shoulder beltanchor into position.

WARNING∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move theshoulder belt anchor up and down tomake sure it is securely fixed inposition.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so may re-duce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in anaccident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, itis not possible to properly fit thelap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extenderthat is compatible with the installed seatbelts is available for purchase. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)of length and may be used for either thedriver or front passenger seating position.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for assistance with purchasing anextender if an extender is required.

LRS0242


WARNING∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company whichmade the original equipment seatbelts, should be used with NISSANseat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary usecould result in serious personal injuryin the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-stall child restraints. If the child re-straint is not secured properly, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-ommended for cleaning upholstery orcarpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allowthe seat belts to dry in the shade. Do notallow the seat belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, theseat belts may retract slowly. Wipe theshoulder belt guide with a clean, drycloth.

∙ Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, suchas buckles, tongues, retractors, flexiblewires and anchors, work properly. Ifloose parts, deterioration, cuts or otherdamage on the webbing is found, theentire seat belt assembly should be re-placed.

WARNINGDo not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seatbelt becomes wrapped around a child’sneck with the ALR mode activated, thechild can be seriously injured or killed ifthe seat belt retracts and becomestight. This can occur even if the vehicleis parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-lease the child. If the seat belt cannot beunbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-lease the child by cutting the seat beltwith a suitable tool (such as a knife orscissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properly re-strained.

In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, includ-ing doctors, teachers, government trafficsafety offices, and community organiza-tions. Every child is different, so be sure tolearn the best way to transport your child.

CHILD SAFETY


There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’ssize. Generally, infants up to about 1 yearand less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placedin rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for chil-dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-straints and are at least 1 year old. Boosterseats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNINGInfants and children need special pro-tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may notfit them properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-tal injury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require the use of approved childrestraints for infants and small children. Foradditional information, refer to “Child re-straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-chors and Tethers for CHildren) system orwith the vehicle seat belt. For additionalinformation, refer to “Child restraints” in thissection.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important becauseyour vehicle has a supplemental re-straint system (air bag system) for thefront passenger. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should beplaced in a rear-facing child restraint.NISSAN recommends that infants beplaced in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose a child restraint that fitsyour vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation anduse.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over 1 year old and weighat least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in arear-facing child restraint as long as pos-sible up to the height or weight limit of thechild restraint. Children who outgrow theheight or weight limit of the rear-facingchild restraint and are at least 1 year oldshould be secured in a forward-facing childrestraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-facturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommen-dations. NISSAN recommends that smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose achild restraint that fits your vehicle and al-ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use.


LARGER CHILDRENChildren should remain in a forward-facingchild restraint with a harness until theyreach the maximum height or weight limitallowed by the child restraint manufac-turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weightlimit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommendsthat the child be placed in a commerciallyavailable booster seat to obtain properseat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, thebooster seat should raise the child so thatthe shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the chest and the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder. The shoulder beltshould not cross the neck or face andshould not fall off the shoulder. The lap beltshould lie snugly across the lower hips orupper thighs, not the abdomen. A boosterseat can only be used in seating positionsthat have a three-point type seat belt. Thebooster seat should fit the vehicle seat andhave a label certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until thechild can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against thevehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily overthe front edge of the seat with feet flaton the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt(lap belt low and snug across the hipsand shoulder belt across mid-chestand shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in positionfor the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-tions, the child should remain in a boosterseat using a three-point type seat belt.

LRS2690


NOTE:

Laws in some communities may followdifferent guidelines. Check local andstate regulations to confirm your child isusing the correct restraint system beforetraveling.

WARNINGNever let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in thecargo area. The child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a sudden stop orcollision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS


– The child restraint must be usedand installed properly. Always fol-low all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

– Infants and children should neverbe held on anyone’s lap. Even thestrongest adult cannot resist theforces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around botha child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that childrenare safer when properly restrainedin the rear seat than in the frontseat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the frontseat, refer to “Forward-facing childrestraint installation using the seatbelts” in this section.

– Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-straint that will fit the child and ve-hicle. Some child restraints maynot fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used to at-tach adult seat belts, or other itemsor equipment to the vehicle. Doingso could damage the child re-straint anchorages. The child re-straint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properlyinstalled using the damaged an-chorage, and a child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points foradult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in thefront passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the childrestraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate childrestraint while in the vehicle.

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt. In asudden stop or collision, loose objectscan injure occupants or damage thevehicle.

CAUTIONA child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seatingsurface and buckles before placing achild in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universalchild restraint anchor system, referred toas the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system. Some child restraintsinclude rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to these an-chors. For additional information, refer to“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatiblechild restraint, the vehicle seat belts can beused.


Several manufacturers offer child re-straints for infants and children of varioussizes. When selecting any child restraint,keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the vehi-cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in the childrestraint and check the various adjust-ments to be sure the child restraint iscompatible with your child. Choose achild restraint that is designed for yourchild’s height and weight. Always followall recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is less than 65 lbs.(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCHanchors or the seat belt to install thechild restraint (not both at the sametime).

∙ If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is greater than 65 lbs.(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (notthe lower anchors) to install the childrestraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions for installa-tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-quires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to thedesignated anchor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with special an-chor points that are used with LATCH sys-tem compatible child restraints. This sys-tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIXor ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seatbelt to secure the child restraint unless thecombined weight of the child and child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and child restraintis greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-

LATCH system lower anchor locations -2nd, 3rd and 4th rows

LRS3015


hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) toinstall the child restraint. Be sure to followthe child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are pro-vided to install child restraints in the follow-ing positions only:

∙ 2nd and 3rd row center position only

∙ 4th row driver’s side inboard seatingposition only

LATCH lower anchor

WARNINGFailure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the loca-tions shown in the illustration.

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-serting your fingers into the loweranchor area. Feel to make surethere are no obstructions over theanchors such as seat belt webbingor seat cushion material. The childrestraint will not be secured prop-erly if the lower anchors areobstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used to at-tach adult seat belts, or other itemsor equipment to the vehicle. Doingso could damage the child re-straint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly in-stalled using the damagedanchorage, and a child could beseriously injured or killed in acollision.

LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located asshown. A label is attached to the seatbackto help you locate the LATCH lower an-chors.

LATCH lower anchor locationLRS2128


WARNINGChild restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damage thechild restraint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly installed us-ing the damaged anchorage, and achild could be seriously injured or killedin a collision

Installing child restraint LATCHlower anchor attachmentsLATCH compatible child restraints includetwo rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to two an-chors located at certain seating positionsin your vehicle. With this system, you do nothave to use a vehicle seat belt to secure thechild restraint. Check your child restraint fora label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in theinstructions provided by the child restraintmanufacturer.

LATCH label locations 2nd and 3rd rowsLRS3016

LATCH label locations 4th rowLRS3017

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661


When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to thetop tether anchor. Properly secure thecargo so it does not contact the toptether strap. Cargo that is not properlysecured or cargo that contacts the toptether strap may damage it during acollision. A child could be seriously in-jured or killed in a collision if the toptether strap is damaged.

∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damagethe child restraint anchorages. Thechild restraint will not be properly in-stalled using the damaged anchor-ages, and a child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

�A Top tether strap

�B Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locationThe anchor points are located in the follow-ing locations:

∙ 2nd row and 3rd row seats – on theseatback as shown.

∙ 4th row seats – on the seatback asshown.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662

2nd and 3rd row seatsLRS2730


REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHFor additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint in the 2nd, 3rd and 4th rowseats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors. Check to make sure the LATCHattachment is properly attached to thelower anchors.

4th row seatLRS2731

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2WRS0801


3. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your hand to com-press the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint or try installing by using

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3LRS0673



the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Notall child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 2 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

WARNINGThe three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will result inthe child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.


Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seats: 1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in thefront seat. Position the child restrainton the seat. Always follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256


2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the ALR mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to the ELRmode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slackin the belt.





5. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the childrestraint to compress the vehicle seatcushion and seatback while pulling upon the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.Try to tug it forward and check to see ifthe belt holds the restraint in place. Ifthe restraint is not secure, tighten theseat belt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse. If the seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHFor additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.





Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint in the 2nd, 3rd and 4throw seats using the LATCH system:


2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors. Check to make sure the LATCHattachment is properly attached to thelower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point. For additionalinformation, refer to “Installing toptether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have atop tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the cor-rect child restraint fit. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to reinstallthe head restraint/headrest whenthe child restraint is removed. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –step 2

WRS0799Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800


If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint/headrestand it is interfering with the properchild restraint fit, try another seatingposition or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your knee to com-press the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer’s instructions to re-move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 4LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6WRS0697


7. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 3 through 6.


�B Anchor point

Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withthe LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with theLATCH lower anchors.

2nd and 3rd row bench seat

1. Remove the head restraint/headrestand store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap �A asshown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tetheranchor point �B as shown.


WARNINGChild restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damage thechild restraint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly installed us-ing the damaged anchorage, and achild could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

2nd and 3rd row bench seatLRS2730



�B Anchor point

4th row bench seat

WARNINGIn the 4th row bench seat, a child re-straint with a top tether strap can onlybe used on the middle-driver’s sideseating position. Do not place in theother seating position and attempt toangle the tether strap to the middle-driver’s side seating position.

The middle-driver’s side of the 4th rowbench seat is the seating position that canuse a top tether strap. First, secure the childrestraint with the seat belt, as applicable.



3. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer’s instructions to re-move any slack. Make sure the headrestraint/headrest does not contactthe top tether strap.

If you have any questions when install-ing a top tether strap, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for details.


FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS

WARNINGThe three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will result inthe child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision.

4th row bench seatLRS2731


For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.


Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seatbelt in the rear seats or in the front passen-ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position.Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in thefront seat.


The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the cor-rect child restraint fit. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to reinstallthe head restraint/headrest whenthe child restraint is removed. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint/headrestand it is interfering with the properchild restraint fit, try another seatingposition or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699


3. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point. For additionalinformation, refer to “Installing toptether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-quire the use of a top tether strap inseating positions that do not have atop tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the ALR mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to ELR modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.




5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slackin the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the childrestraint with your knee to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatbackwhile pulling up on the seat belt.


8. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.Try to tug it forward and check to see ifthe seat belt holds the restraint inplace. If the restraint is not secure,tighten the seat belt as necessary andtest it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.





9. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 3 through 8.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.


�B Anchor point

Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withseat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.

2nd and 3rd row bench seat

1. Remove the head restraint/headrestand store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.





2nd and 3rd row bench seatLRS2730



�B Anchor point

4th row bench seat

WARNINGIn the 4th row bench seat, a child re-straint with a top tether strap can onlybe used on the middle-driver’s sideseating position. Do not place in theother seating position and attempt toangle the tether strap to the middle-driver’s side seating position.

The middle-driver’s side of the 4th rowbench seat is the seating position that canuse a top tether strap. First, secure the childrestraint with the seat belt, as applicable.



3. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer’s instructions to re-move any slack. Make sure the headrestraint/headrest does not contactthe top tether strap.

If you have any questions when install-ing a top tether strap, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for details.


BOOSTER SEATSFor additional information on installing abooster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-structions outlined in this section.

4th row bench seatLRS2731


Precautions on booster seats

WARNINGIf a booster seat and seat belt are notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured or killed in a sudden stop or col-lision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’sface and neck and the lap portionof the belt does not cross thestomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under thechild’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-stalled in a seating position thathas a lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seatB. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the following pointsin mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the vehi-cle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS2479 LRS0453


∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-erly supported by the booster seat orvehicle seat. The seatback must be ator above the center of the child’s ears.For example, if a low back booster seatis chosen, the vehicle seatback must beat or above the center of the child’s ears.If the seatback is lower than the centerof the child’s ears, a high back boosterseat should be used.

∙ If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place the child in thebooster seat and check the various ad-justments to be sure the booster seat iscompatible with the child. Always followall recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply tobooster seat installation in the rear seatsor the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNINGTo avoid injury to child, do not use thelap/shoulder belt in the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-tions of this manual before installing a childrestraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seatin the rear seat or in the front passengerseat:

LRS0464


1. If you must install a booster seat inthe front seat, move the seat to therearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front-facing direction.Always follow the booster seat manu-facturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the cor-rect booster seat fit. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to reinstallthe head restraint/headrest whenthe booster seat is removed. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint/headrestand it is interfering with the properbooster seat fit, try another seatingposition or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat beltlow and snug on the child’s hips. Besure to follow the booster seat manu-facturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjust-ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in “Three-point type seatbelt with retractor” in this section.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454


PRECAUTIONS ON SRSThis SRS section contains important infor-mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-tal front-impact air bag

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-tem

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the head and chest of the driverand front passenger in certain frontal colli-sions.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest and pelvic area of thedriver and front passenger in certain sideimpact collisions. The side air bags are de-signed to inflate on the side where the ve-hicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions in certainside-impact or rollover collisions. In a sideimpact, the curtain air bags are designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted. In a rollover, both curtain and airbags are designed to inflate and remaininflated for a short time.

This supplemental restraint system is de-signed to supplement the crash protec-tion provided by the driver and front pas-senger seat belts and is not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be cor-rectly worn and the occupant seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and door finishers.For additional information, refer to “Seatbelts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is placed in theON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS)


WARNING∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,rear impact, rollover, or lower severityfrontal collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bagsare most effective when you are sit-ting well back and upright in the seat.The front air bags inflate with greatforce. If you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of po-sition in any way, you are at greaterrisk of injury or death in a crash. Youmay also receive serious or fatal inju-ries from the front air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sitback against the seatback and as faraway as practical from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Alwaysproperly use the seat belts.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them insidethe steering wheel rim could increasethe risk that they are injured when thefront air bag inflates.

∙ The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sen-sors that detect if the seat belts arefastened. The air bag system moni-tors the severity of a collision andthen inflates the air bags as neededbased on belt usage. Failure to prop-erly wear seat belts can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.WRS0031


WARNING∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold themin your lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041


ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044


WARNING∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain side-impact rolloverair bags inflate if they are not properlyrestrained. Pre-teens and childrenshould be properly restrained in therear seat, if possible.

∙ Never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflatingfront air bag could seriously injure orkill your child. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Child restraints” in thissection.

WARNINGFront seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact rolloversupplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the eventof a frontal impact, rear impact orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reducethe risk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431


∙ The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain and air bags are most effec-tive when you are sitting well backand upright in the seat with both feeton the floor. The side air bag and cur-tain and air bag inflate with greatforce. Do not allow anyone to placetheir hand, leg or face near the side airbag on the side of the seatback of thefront seat or near the side roof rails.Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats to extend their hand out ofthe window or lean against the door.Some examples of dangerous ridingpositions are shown in the previousillustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withside air bag inflation.

SSS0159 SSS0162


Supplemental air bag system1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

2. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s sideshown; front passenger side similar)

3. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

5. Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

6. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules

7. Satellite sensors

The driver supplemental front-impact airbag is located in the center of the steeringwheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dash-board above the glove box. The front airbags are designed to inflate in higher se-verity frontal collisions, although they mayinflate if the forces in another type of colli-sion are similar to those of a higher severityfrontal impact. They may not inflate in cer-tain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (orlack of it) is not always an indication ofproper front air bag system operation.LRS3166


If you have any questions about your airbag system, it is recommended that youcontact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If youare considering modification of your ve-hicle due to a disability, you may also con-tact NISSAN. Contact information is con-tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by the re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita-tion and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants.They can help save lives and reduce seri-ous injuries. However, an inflating front airbag may cause facial abrasions or otherinjuries. Front air bags do not provide re-straint to the lower body.

Seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from the steering wheelor instrument panel. The front air bags in-flate quickly in order to help protect thefront occupants. Because of this, the force

of the front air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after acollision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position.

After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

Other supplemental air bag precautions

WARNING∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steer-ing wheel or instrument panel. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system orsuspension system this could affectproper operation of the air bagsystem.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-tem may result in serious personal in-jury. Tampering includes changes tothe steering wheel and the instru-ment panel assembly by placing ma-terial over the steering wheel pad andabove the instrument panel or by in-stalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.


∙ It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe front air bag system. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring har-nesses* should not be modified or dis-connected. Unauthorized electricaltest equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the air bagsystem.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect the function of thesupplemental air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identifica-tion.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag androof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplementalair bag systemsThe side air bags are located in the outsideof the seatback of the front seats. The cur-tain air bags are located in the side roofrails in all four rows. All of the information,cautions and warnings in this manualmust be followed. The side air bags andcurtain air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity side collisions, althoughthey may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of ahigher severity impact. They are designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted. They may not inflate in certainside collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflatein certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-ments (for example, during severe off-roading) may cause the curtain air bags toinflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not alwaysan indication of proper side air bag andcurtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke isnot harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as itmay cause irritation and choking. Thosewith a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest of the front occupants. Curtainair bags help to cushion the impact force tothe head of occupants in the front and rearoutboard seating positions in all rows. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious in-

LRS2732


juries. However, an inflating side air bag orcurtain air bag may cause abrasions orother injuries. Side air bags and curtain airbags do not provide restraint to the lowerbody.

The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and passenger seated up-right as far as practical away from the sideair bag. Rear seat passengers should beseated as far away as practical from thedoor finishers and side roof rails. The sideair bags and curtain air bags inflate quicklyin order to help protect the occupants. Be-cause of this, the force of the side air bagsand curtain air bags inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, these air bag modules dur-ing inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for ashort time.

The side air bags and curtain air bagsoperate only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

WARNING∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, donot place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door fin-isher and the front seat. Such objectsmay become dangerous projectilesand cause injury if a side air baginflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side airbag and curtain air bag system com-ponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damage toor accidental inflation of the side airbag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thecurtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-tem may result in serious personal in-jury. For example, do not change thefront seats by placing material nearthe seatbacks or by installing addi-tional trim material, such as seat cov-ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work around and onthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. It is also recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-tion of electrical equipment. The SRSwiring harnesses* should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthor-ized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be usedon the side air bag or curtain air bagsystems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectorsare yellow or orange for easy identifica-tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the side airbags and curtain air bag system and guidethe buyer to the appropriate sections inthis Owner’s Manual.


Seat belt with pretensioner(s)(front seats)

WARNING∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-placed together with the retractorand buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but pretensioner(s) are notactivated, be sure to have the preten-sioner system checked and, if neces-sary, replaced. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is toprevent damage to or accidental acti-vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-ing with the pretensioner system mayresult in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe pretensioner system. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. Unauthorized electricaltest equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the preten-sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. Incorrect dis-posal procedures could cause per-sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activatewith the supplemental air bag system incertain types of collisions. Working with theseat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) helptighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within theseat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.These seat belts are used the same way asconventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indi-cate a fire. Care should be taken not toinhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breath-ing condition should get fresh air promptly.After the pretensioner(s’) activation, loadlimiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces againstthe chest.

The supplemental air bag warninglight is used to indicate malfunctionsin the pretensioner system. For additionalinformation, refer to "Supplemental air bagwarning light" in this section. If the opera-tion of the supplemental air bag warninglight indicates there is a malfunction, havethe system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the preten-sioner system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.


1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on thesurface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLABELSWarning labels about the supplementalfront-impact air bag system are placed inthe vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNINGDo not use a rear-facing child restrainton a seat protected by an air bag infront of it. If the air bag deploys, it maycause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLIGHTThe supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.When the ignition switch is placed in the ONor START position, the supplemental airbag warning light illuminates for about7 seconds and then turns off. This meansthe system is operational.

LRS2035 LRS0100


If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensionersystems may not operate properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

WARNINGIf the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand/or pretensioner systems will notoperate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Repair and replacementprocedureThe front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags and pretensioner(s) are designed toinflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-mental air bag warning light remains illu-minated after inflation has occurred. Thesesystems should be repaired and/or re-placed as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

When maintenance work is required on thevehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-lated parts should be pointed out to theperson performing the maintenance. Theignition switch should always be placed inthe LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function againand must be replaced. Additionally,the activated pretensioner(s) mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pretensioner(s) should be re-placed. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.However, the air bag module and pre-tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems and the pretensionersystem should be inspected if there isany damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag or pretensioner sys-tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Distance To Empty (DTE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic transmission fluidtemperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Trip computer warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Rear window and outside mirror(if so equipped) defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system . . . . . . . 2-32Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-35Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Front and rear sonar system off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Tow mode switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

12v outlet(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39120v outlets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Seat pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Under-seat storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Instrument panel storage trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Grocery hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Manual vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

1. Headlight switch (P. 2-31)2. Vents (P. 4-23)3. Front fog light switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-31)4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-29)

Headlight and turn signal switch(P. 2-31)

5. Steering wheel switch for audiocontrol (P. 4-73)Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem (P. 4-76, 4-95)

6. Driver supplemental air bag(P. 1-55)Horn (P. 2-34)

7. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)Warning and indicator lights(P. 2-18)

8. Cruise control switches (P. 5-18)9. Shift lever (P. 5-12)10. Storage tray (P. 2-42)11. Audio system controls (P. 4-37)

Navigation system* (if soequipped) (P. 4-10)

12. Storage tray (P. 2-43)13. Supplemental air bag (P. 1-55)14. Glove box (P. 2-44)15. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)16. Climate controls (P. 4-24)LII2650

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

17. Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)Front and rear sonar system OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)Power inverter switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-36)Heated seat switches(if so equipped) (P. 2-34)Tow mode switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-38)USB connection port (P. 4-57)AUX IN jack (P. 4-57)

18. 12v power outlet (P. 2-39)19. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)20. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-15)21. Hood release switch (P. 3-12)22. Fuse box (P. 8-23)23. Outside power mirror switch

(P. 3-16)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-35)

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).


1. Warning lights and indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Speedometer4. Fuel gauge

5. PUSH TRIP knobInstrument brightness controlknob

LIC2037

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

6. OdometerTwin trip odometerTrip computerAutomatic transmission positionindicator

7. INFO knob8. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETERThis vehicle is equipped with a speedom-eter and odometer. The speedometer islocated on the right side of the meter clus-ter. The odometer is located within the tripcomputer.

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-played when the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position.

The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle is driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Pressing the PUSH TRIP knob �1 changesthe display as follows:

Odometer only → Trip A → Trip B → Odom-eter only

Resetting the trip odometer

Press the PUSH TRIP knob �1 for more than1 second to reset the currently displayedtrip odometer to zero.

LIC3663 LIC2042


TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGEThe gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature. The engine coolant tempera-ture is within the normal range �1 whenthe gauge needle points within the zoneshown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varieswith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

CAUTIONIf the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over thenormal range, stop the vehicle as soonas safely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.For additional information, refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manualfor immediate action required.

LIC2041 LIC2038


FUEL GAUGEThe gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) af-ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-isters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-fillerdoor is located on the driver’s side of thevehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible.After a few driving trips, the lightshould turn off. If the light remains onafter a few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthis section.

DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)Displays the estimated distance the ve-hicle can be driven before refueling. Thevalue is calculated based on recent fueleconomy, the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank, and the actual fuel consump-tion.

Changes in driving patterns or conditionscan cause the DTE value to vary. As a result,the value displayed may differ from the ac-tual distance that can be driven.

DTE display will change to “---” when thefuel level in the tank is getting low, prior tothe fuel gauge reaching E (Empty).

NOTE:

∙ The DTE value after refill is estimatedbased on recent fuel economy andamount of fuel added.

∙ If a small amount of fuel is added, orthe ignition is on during refueling, thedisplay may not be updated.

∙ Conditions that affect the fueleconomy will also affect the esti-mated DTE value (city/highway driv-ing, idle time, remote start time, ter-rain, seasonal weather, added vehicleweight, added deflectors, roof racks,etc.).

LIC2057


ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGEThe gauge indicates the engine lubricationsystem oil pressure while the engine is run-ning. The indicator should be in the middleof the gauge when the engine is running.The digital gauge displays in the trip com-puter by pressing the INFO knob one time.

CAUTION∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. For additional in-formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the“Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

∙ If the gauge does not move with theproper amount of the engine oil, havethe vehicle checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. Continued vehicle op-eration in such a condition couldcause serious damage to the engine.

VOLTMETERWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the voltmeter indicates the bat-tery voltage. When the engine is running, itindicates the generator voltage. To viewthe digital gauge in the trip computer pressthe INFO knob two times.

While cranking the engine, the volts dropbelow the normal range. If the range is notwithin the normal range (11 – 15 volts) �1while the engine is running, it may indicatethat the charging system is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

LIC2056 LIC2055


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGEThis gauge indicates the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid. The au-tomatic transmission fluid temperature isin the normal range �1 when the gaugeindication is within the zone shown in theillustration. To view the digital gauge in thetrip computer, press the INFO knob threetimes.

CAUTION∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate

low automatic transmission fluidlevel. Use the dipstick to check thefluid level. For additional information,refer to “5-speed Automatic Trans-mission Fluid (ATF)” and “7–speed Au-tomatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)” inthe “Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

∙ If the gauge indicates automatictransmission fluid temperature overthe normal range, stop the vehicle assoon as safely possible. Have the ve-hicle checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice. Continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage thetransmission.

TRIP COMPUTERThe trip computer is located between thespeedometer and the tachometer.

1. INFO knob

2. Outside temperature

3. Digital gauges

4. Message center/maintenance icons

5. Range — Avg mph — Time — Tire info—Settings — Warnings/Message center

LIC2054 LIC2099


How to use the trip computerRotate the INFO knob, located on the left ofthe instrument panel just behind the steer-ing wheel, to display the following modes:

Range → Avg mph → Time → Tire info →Settings → Warnings

Range modeThe range mode can be selected to giveyou an estimation of the distance that canbe driven before refueling. The range isconstantly calculated based on theamount of fuel in the fuel tank and theactual fuel consumption.

Average speed modeThe average speed mode can be selectedto display the average miles per hour sincethe last reset.

LIC2097 LIC2091


Time (elapsed) modeThe time (elapsed) mode can be selectedto show the time driven since the last reset.

Tire pressure information modeThe specific tire pressure of each tire (ex-cept the spare) can be viewed by rotatingthe INFO knob:

∙ Front left — FL PSI (KPA)

∙ Front right — FR PSI (KPA)

∙ Rear left — RL PSI (KPA)

∙ Rear right — RR PSI (KPA)

Setting modeThe setting mode allows you to set re-minders or preferences for maintenanceintervals, reset the TPMS after rotating thetires or to change the unit of the display.

LIC2092 LIC2093 LIC2098


In the setting mode screen, rotate the INFOknob to view the following settings:

∙ Engine Oil

∙ Oil Filter

∙ Rotation

∙ Other

∙ TPMS Menu

∙ Units

Press the INFO knob to select and changeone of the following menu items:

∙ Maintenance

∙ Reset TPMS

∙ Unit (US — METRIC)

Warning modeThe warning mode can be selected to viewany warnings that may be present. Oncethe screen is selected you have the optionof skipping the warning or viewing it in de-tail.

Warnings can be present for issues such aslow tire pressure or a loose fuel cap. Foradditional information, refer to “Trip com-puter warnings” in this section.

UnitsThe units shown in the trip computer canbe changed:

∙ US

∙ METRIC

LIC2096 LIC3078


Indicators for maintenance1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator and REMINDER appearswhen the customer set distancecomes for changing the engine oil. Youcan set or reset the distance for chang-ing the engine oil. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Setting mode” in thissection.

2. Oil filter replacement indicatorThis indicator and REMINDER appearswhen the customer set distancecomes for replacing the oil filter. Youcan set or reset the distance for replac-ing the oil filter. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Setting mode” in this sec-tion.

3. Tire rotation indicatorThis indicator and REMINDER appearswhen the customer set distancecomes for rotating the tires. For addi-tional information, refer to “Settingmode” in this section.

WARNINGThe tire rotation indicator is not a sub-stitute for regular tire checks, includingtire pressure checks. For additional in-formation, refer to “Changing wheelsand tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” sectionof this manual. Many factors includingtire inflation, alignment, driving habitsand road conditions affect tire wear andwhen tires should be replaced. Settingthe tire replacement indicator for a cer-tain driving distance does not meanyour tires will last that long. Use the tirereplacement indicator as a guide onlyand always perform regular tire checks.Failure to perform regular tire checks,including tire pressure checks could re-sult in tire failure. Serious vehicle dam-age could occur and may lead to a colli-sion, which could result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

LIC2132


4. Other indicatorThis indicator and REMINDER messageappears when the customer’s set dis-tance is achieved. This reminder can beused for other maintenance itemssuch as air filter, brakes, or washer fluid.You can set or reset the distance forthis reminder. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Setting mode” in this sec-tion. For scheduled maintenance itemsand intervals, refer to the “Maintenanceand schedules” section of this manual.

TPMS menuFrom the setting mode screen rotate theINFO knob to select RESET TPMS. For addi-tional information, refer to “TPMS sensorreset” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

TRIP COMPUTER WARNINGSThis vehicle has various warnings that willappear in the trip computer to indicate apotential problem.

PARK BRAKE warningThis warning illuminates in the messagearea of the trip computer when the parkingbrake is set and the vehicle is driven.

LOW FUEL warningThis warning illuminates in the messagearea of the trip computer when the fuellevel in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel assoon as it is convenient, preferably beforethe fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). Therewill be a small reserve of fuel in the tankwhen the fuel gauge needle reaches E(Empty).

TIRE PRES warningThis warning appears in the trip computerif low tire pressure is detected while drivingand each time the ignition switch is placedin the ON position. The low tire pressurewarning light will also illuminate. The TIREPRES warning will appear and automati-cally advance to the next screen after aperiod of time or by pushing the INFO knobto show the location(s) and pressure(s) ofthe under-inflated tires.

Example:CHECK TIRE → RL 38 PSI → RR 39 PSI →CHECK TIRE

If this warning appears, stop the vehicle andadjust the tire pressure to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label. For addi-tional information, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

TPMS ERROR warningThis warning appears in the message areaof the trip computer if the TPMS is not func-tioning properly. Have the system checked.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

LOW OIL P warningThis warning appears in the message areaof the trip computer if low oil pressure isdetected. This gauge is not designed toindicate low oil level. The low oil pressurewarning is not designed to indicate a lowoil level. Use the dipstick to check the oillevel. For additional information, refer to“Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual.

LO VOLTAGE warningThis warning appears in the message areaof the trip computer if the system detectsthat the charging system is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Voltmeter” in this section.


LOOSE FUEL CAP warningThis warning appears in the message areaof the trip computer when the fuel-filler capis not tightened correctly after the vehiclehas been refueled. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section ofthis manual.

A/T TEMP warningThis light comes on when the automatictransmission oil temperature is too high. Ifthe message displays in the message areaof the trip computer during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop theengine immediately and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetismand indicates heading direction of vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position,press the button as described in thechart below to activate various features ofthe automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Press and holdthebutton forabout:

Feature:(Press button again for about1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds Automatic anti-glare/indicatorlight toggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changedto correct false compass read-ings

13 seconds Compass enters calibrationmode

For additional information, refer to “Auto-matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion of this manual.

COMPASS DISPLAYPress the button for about 1 secondwhen the ignition key is in the ON positionto toggle the compass direction display �1on or off. The display will indicate the direc-tion of the vehicle’s heading:

∙ N: North

∙ E: East

∙ S: South

∙ W: West

WIC0904

COMPASS (if so equipped)


If the “CAL” or “C” icon is illuminated in thecompass display, calibrate the compass bydriving the vehicle in three complete circlesat less than 5 mph (8 km/h).You can also calibrate the compass by driv-ing your vehicle on your everyday route.The compass will be calibrated once it hastracked three complete circles.

WIC0355


Zone variation change procedureThe difference between magnetic northand geographical north is known as vari-ance. In some areas, this difference cansometimes be great enough to cause falsecompass readings. Follow these instruc-tions to set the variance for your particularlocation if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button forabout 11 seconds. The current zonenumber will appear in the display. Re-lease the button.

2. Find your current location on the zonemap. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly totoggle through the zone numbers untilthe desired number appears in the dis-play. Once you have selected a zonenumber, the display will show a com-pass direction within a few seconds.

Inaccurate compass directionThe compass display is equipped with au-tomatic correction function. If the correctdirection is not shown, follow this proce-dure.

1. With the display turned on, press andhold the button for about 13 sec-onds. The “C” icon in the compass dis-play will illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving thevehicle in three complete circles at amaximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

CAUTION∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect theoperation of the compass.

∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as itmay cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.


or Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light

Low fuel warning light and chime High beam indicator light (blue)

Automatic Transmission check warninglight

Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Automatic Transmission oil temperaturewarning light

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light(if so equipped)

Security indicator light (if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Master warning light SET indicator light

Charge warning light Passenger’s seat belt warning light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light TOW mode ON indicator light (if soequipped)

Driver’s seat belt warning light and chime Automatic Transmission position indica-tor light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light CRUISE indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi-cator light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTSAND AUDIBLE REMINDERS


CHECKING LIGHTSWith all doors closed, apply the parkingbrake, fasten the seat belts and place theignition switch in the ON position withoutstarting the engine. The following lights (ifso equipped) will come on:

, orThe following lights (if so equipped) willcome on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , ,,

If any light does not come on or operate ina way other than described, it may indicatea burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-function. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTSThis vehicle has various warning lights thatmay illuminate to indicate a potential prob-lem. For additional information, refer to thespecific light in this section.

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the ABS warning light illuminatesand then turns off. This indicates the ABS isoperational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates whilethe engine is running or while driving, itmay indicate the ABS is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lockfunction is turned off. The brake systemthen operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information,refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Automatic Transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about2 seconds. If the light comes on at anyother time, it may indicate the automatictransmission system is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Automatic Transmission oiltemperature warning light

This light comes on when the automatictransmission oil temperature is too high. Ifthe light comes on while driving, reduce thevehicle speed as soon as safely possibleuntil the light turns off.

CAUTIONContinued vehicle operation when the A/Toil temperature warning light is on maydamage the automatic transmission.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.


Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluidlevel. If the light comes on while the engineis running with the parking brake not ap-plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brakefluid as necessary. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, havethe warning system checked. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

WARNING∙ Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the charging sys-tem is not functioning properly. Turn theengine off and check the generator belt. Ifthe belt is loose, broken, missing, or if thelight remains on, have your vehicle servicedimmediately. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTIONDo not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doorsare not closed securely while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Driver’s seat belt warninglight and chime

The light and chime remind you to fastenyour seat belt. The light illuminates when-ever the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition and remains illuminated until thedriver’s seat belt is fastened. At the sametime, the chime sounds for about 7 sec-onds unless the driver’s seat belt is se-curely fastened.

For additional information, refer to “Seatbelts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual.

Engine oil pressurewarning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during nor-mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,stop the engine immediately and call aNISSAN dealer or other authorized repairshop.


The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level. Foradditional information, refer to “Engine oil”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

CAUTIONRunning the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Turn off the engine as soon asit is safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light andchime

This light comes on when the fuel level inthe fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soonas it is convenient, preferably before thefuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will bea small reserve of fuel in the tank whenthe fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

A chime sounds briefly when the low fuelwarning light initially comes on. If the lowfuel warning light turns off during the driv-ing trip and then turns on again, the chimewill not sound.

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-tors the tire pressure of all tires except thespare.

The low tire pressure warning light warnsof low tire pressure or indicates that theTPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illumi-nate. A TIRE PRES warning also appearsin the trip computer. Press the INFO knobon the instrument panel located behindthe steering wheel for information aboutlocation(s) and pressure(s) of the under-inflated tire(s).

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjustthe tire pressure of all four tires to therecommended COLD tire pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information la-bel located in the driver’s door opening.The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tirepressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-flated to the recommended pressure,the vehicle must be driven at speedsabove 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the low tire pressurewarning light. Use a tire pressure gaugeto check the tire pressure.

The TIRE PRES warning is active as long asthe low tire pressure warning light remainsilluminated.

For additional information, refer to “Tripcomputer” in this section and “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Startingand driving” section and in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, thelow tire pressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Have thesystem checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.The "TIRE PRES" warning does not appear ifthe low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. In-stead, “TPMS ERROR” will appear in the tripcomputer.


For additional information, refer to “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section and “Tirepressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual.

WARNING∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Thosewho use a pacemaker should contactthe electric medical equipmentmanufacturer for the possible influ-ences before use.

∙ If the light does not illuminate withthe ignition switch placed in the ONposition, have the vehicle checked assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury ordeath. Check the tire pressure for allfour tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshow on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label located in the driver’sdoor opening to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light off. If the light stillilluminates while driving after adjust-ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flator the TPMS may be malfunctioning. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible. If no tireis flat and all tires are properly in-flated, have the vehicle checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tire pres-sure warning light will flash for ap-proximately 1 minute. The light will re-main on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could affectthe proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 mph (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the four wheels correctly.


Low windshield-washerfluid warning light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Addwindshield-washer fluid as necessary. Foradditional information, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.

Master warning light

This light illuminates when various tripcomputer warnings appear.

Passenger’s seat beltwarning light

The light reminds you to notify the passen-ger to fasten their seat belt. The light illumi-nates whenever the ignition is placed in theON or START position and remains illumi-nated until the passenger’s seat belt is fas-tened.

The light will remain on for 30 secondswhen the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)and the passenger seat belt is unfastened.If the passenger seat belt is fastened within30 seconds, the light will turn off.

For additional information, refer to “Seatbelts” in the “Safety-Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual for precautions on seat beltusage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONor START position, the supplemental airbag warning light illuminates for about7 seconds and then turns off. This meansthe system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,and pretensioner seat belt systems needservicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-mental restraint system (air bag system)and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-tion properly. For additional information, re-fer to “Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual.

WARNINGIf the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand/or pretensioner systems will notoperate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTSThis vehicle has various indicator lightsthat may illuminate to indicate a systemstatus. For additional information, refer tothe specific light in this section.


Automatic Transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this indicator light shows the shiftlever position. For additional information,refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

CRUISE indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise controlswitch is pushed. The light goes out whenthe switch is pushed again. When theCRUISE indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational. For addi-tional information, refer to “Cruise control”in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-light high beams are on and goes out whenthe low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comeson when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady orblinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate a potential emission control mal-function.

The may also come on steady if thefuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if thevehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make surethe fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.After a few driving trips, the lightshould turn off if no other potential emis-sion control system malfunction exists.When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion, sometimes the indicator light may il-luminate for 20 seconds and then blink for10 seconds, without the engine running.This is due to a function of checking theengine control system, and it is not a mal-function. After a few normal drives, thisfunction will not occur and the staysilluminated with the ignition switch in theON position.

CAUTIONIncorrect setting of the engine controlsystem may lead to non-compliance oflocal and national emission laws andregulations.

OperationThe MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been de-tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if theLOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears inthe trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap isloose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after afew driving trips. If the light doesnot turn off after a few driving trips, havethe vehicle inspected. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has beendetected which may damage the emis-sion control system. To reduce or avoidemission control system damage:

– Do not drive at speeds above45 mph (72 km/h).


– Avoid hard acceleration or decelera-tion.

– Avoid steep uphill grades.

– If possible, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come onsteady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTIONContinued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, reducedfuel economy, and possible damage tothe emission control system.

Security indicator light (ifso equipped)

This light blinks whenever the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.This function indicates the security systemequipped on the vehicle is operational.

For additional information, refer to “Securitysystems” in this section.

SET indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speedis controlled by the cruise control system. Ifthe light blinks while the engine is running,it may indicate the cruise control system isnot functioning properly. Have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op-erating, thus alerting the driver to the factthat the road surface is slippery and thevehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working;this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds afterthe VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in theON position. The light will turn off after ap-proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-erational. If the light does not come onhave the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

TOW mode ON indicatorlight (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the tow modefunction is on.

For additional information, refer to “Towmode switch” in this section.

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turnsignal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch isturned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when theVDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-cates the VDC system has been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine and the system will operatenormally. For additional information, referto “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.


The VDC OFF indicator light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in theON position. The light will turn off afterabout 2 seconds if the system is opera-tional. If the light stays on or comes onalong with the indicator light whileyou are driving, have the VDC systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.While the VDC system is operating, youmight feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-tem working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERSBrake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a disc brake pad requiresreplacement, it makes a high pitchedscraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked as soonas possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door isopened while the key is left in the ignitionswitch. Remove the key and take it with youwhen leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFFposition, a chime sounds when the driver’sdoor is opened if the headlights or parkinglights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off beforeleaving the vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chimeA chime sounds if the parking brake is setand the vehicle is driven.

Your vehicle may have one of the followingsecurity systems:

∙ Vehicle security system

∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visualand audible alarm signals if someoneopens the doors when the system isarmed. It is not, however, a motion detec-tion type system that activates when a ve-hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

LIC2047

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)


theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your keys in the ignition, andalways lock the vehicle when unattended.Be aware of your surroundings, and park insecure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offersuch equipment. Check with your insur-ance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protectionfeatures.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. Thedoors can be locked with the key,power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked and then closed), or keyfob.

Key fob operation:

∙ Press the button on the keyfob. All doors lock. The hazard lightsflash twice and the horn beeps onceto indicate all doors are locked.

∙ When the button is pressedwith all doors locked, the hazardlights flash twice and the horn beepsonce as a reminder that the doorsare already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Foradditional information, refer to “Silenc-ing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion of this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator lightcomes on. The light stays on forabout 30 seconds. The vehicle securitysystem is now pre-armed. After about30 seconds the vehicle security systemautomatically shifts into the armedphase. The light begins to flashonce every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the dooris unlocked by the key or the key fob, orthe ignition switch is placed in the ACCor ON position, the system will not arm.

∙ If the key is turned slowly when lock-ing the door, the system may not arm.Furthermore, if the key is turned be-yond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key,the system may be disarmed whenthe key is removed. If the indicatorlight fails to glow for a period of time,unlock the door once and lock itagain.

∙ Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition switch in the OFF po-sition.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give thefollowing alarm:

∙ The headlights blink and the hornsounds intermittently.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off aftera period of time. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tamperedwith again. The alarm can be shut off byunlocking the driver’s door with the keyor by pressing the button on thekey fob.


The alarm is activated by:

∙ Opening a door without using the key orkey fob (even if the door is unlocked byusing the inside lock knob or the powerdoor lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-er’s door with the key or by pressingthe button on the key fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) separate from the regis-tered key.

If the no start condition reoccurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.


Security indicator lightThis light blinks when the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK position with the keyremoved from the ignition switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ismalfunctioning, the light will remain onwhile the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

If the light still remains on and/or theengine will not start, seek service for theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System assoon as possible. Please bring all regis-tered keys that you have. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNINGIn freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the windshieldand obscure your vision which may leadto an accident. Warm the windshieldwith the defroster before you wash thewindshield.

LIC0474 LIC3035

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


CAUTION∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with windshield-washerfluid concentrates at full strength.Some methyl alcohol basedwindshield-washer fluid concen-trates may permanently stain thegrille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-centrates with water to the manufac-turer’s recommended levels beforepouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir tomix the windshield-washer fluid con-centrate and water.

The windshield wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

Rotate the end of the lever to operate thewiper at the following speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-eration can be adjusted by turning theknob toward �A (Slower) or �B (Faster).

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-eration

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed op-eration

Rotate the lever the opposite direction �4to have one sweep operation (MIST) of thewiper.

Press the button on the end of the lever �5to operate the washer. The wiper will alsooperate several times.

To defrost the rear window glass, place theignition switch in the ON position and pushthe rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator lightcomes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

To defrost the outside mirrors (if soequipped), start the engine and push theoutside mirror defroster switch on. Theoutside mirror defroster indicator light onthe switch comes on. Push the switchagain to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after approximately 15 minutes.

LIC2061

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH


CAUTIONWhen cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCHLighting

�1 Rotate the switch to the position,and the front parking, tail, license plate,and instrument panel lights will comeon.

�2 Rotate the switch to the position,and the headlights will come on and allthe other lights remain on.

CAUTIONUse the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

LIC2049

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


Headlight beam select�1 To select the high beam function, en-

gage the low beams, and push the le-ver forward until it latches. The highbeam lights come on and theblue indicator light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to return to the lowbeam. For additional information, referto “Headlight control switch” in this sec-tion.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashesthe headlight high beams on and off.The low beams need not be on for thisto function.

Battery saver systemThe battery saver system automaticallyturns off the following lights after a periodof time when the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position and the doors are closed:

∙ Headlights, when the headlight switchis in the or position

∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON posi-tion

After the headlights automatically turn offwith the headlight switch in theor position, the headlights will illumi-nate again if the headlight switch is movedto the OFF position and then turned tothe or position.

CAUTIONEven though the battery saver featureautomatically turns off the headlightsafter a period of time, you should turnthe headlight switch to the OFF positionwhen the engine is not running to avoiddischarging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)SYSTEMThe headlights automatically illuminate ata reduced intensity when the engine isstarted with the parking brake released.The DRL system operates with the head-light switch in the OFF position. Turn theheadlight switch to the or posi-tion for full illumination when driving atnight.If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the DRL system does notilluminate. The DRL system illuminateswhen the parking brake is released. TheDRL system will remain on until the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNINGWhen the DRL system is active, taillights on your vehicle are not on. It isnecessary at dusk to turn on your head-lights. Failure to do so could cause anaccident injuring yourself and others.

LIC3060


INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control oper-ates when the headlight control switch is inthe or position.Turn the knob �1 to adjust the brightnessof the instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCHTurn signal�1 Move the lever up or down until it

latches to signal the turning direction.When the turn is completed, the turnsignal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the point where the in-dicator light begins to flash, but thelever does not latch.

Hold the lever until the lane change is com-pleted.

LIC2053 LIC3061


FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if soequipped)To turn the front fog lights on, turn theheadlight switch to the position, thenpush the fog light switch �1 .To turn them off, push the fog light switch�1 again.

The fog lights will turn off if the headlightsare turned off.

To sound the horn, push the center padarea of the steering wheel.

WARNINGDo not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury.

WARNINGDo not use or allow occupants to usethe seat heater if you or the occupantscannot monitor elevated seat tempera-tures or have an inability to feel pain inbody parts that contact the seat. Use ofthe seat heater by such people couldresult in serious injury.

LIC2197 LIC2051 LIC3762

HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if soequipped)


CAUTION∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine isnot running.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-tended periods or when no one is us-ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result in dam-age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or anysimilar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-inheaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,as desired. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-stat, automatically turning the heateron and off. The indicator light will re-main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to push theswitch to turn it off.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDCsystem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDCOFF switch. The indicator light willcome on.

LIC1548

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH


Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn on the system. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

To use the outlets for devices that require120v power, place the ignition switch in theON position and push the power inverterswitch.

The 400W or 150W on the switch will illumi-nate according to the mode selected. Onlythe 150W is available when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position and thevehicle is being driven. For additional infor-mation, refer to “120v outlets” in this sectionregarding using devices that require thepower inverter switch activated.

CAUTION∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

∙ Do not attempt to use this whiledriving.

∙ Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory. Doingso could significantly drain the bat-tery of your vehicle.

LIC2075

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if soequipped)


WARNINGThe RSS is a convenience but it is not asubstitute for proper backing. Alwaysturn and check that it is safe to do sobefore backing up. Always back upslowly.

The RSS is active when the ignition switchis placed to the ON position and the shiftlever is in R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone isemitted.

The RSS can be disabled by pushing theOFF switch. When the system is disabled,the indicator light on the switch will illumi-nate. Push the switch again to enable thesystem. The indicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset thenext time the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position.

For additional information, refer to “RearSonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

WARNING∙ The front sonar system is a conve-

nience but it is not a substitute forproper driving.

∙ The rear sonar system is a conve-nience but it is not a substitute forproper backing. Always turn andcheck that it is safe to do so beforebacking up. Always back up slowly.

LIC2074 LIC1182

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFFSWITCH (if so equipped)

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEMOFF SWITCH (if so equipped)


The front sonar system is active when theignition switch is in the ON position and theshift lever is in a forward gear position. Abeeping tone is emitted when the sensorsdetect obstacles within 3 ft (1.0 m) of thefront bumper.

The rear sonar system is active when theignition switch is in the ON position and theshift lever is in R (Reverse). A beeping tone isemitted when the sensors detect ob-stacles within 5.9 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bum-per.

The front and rear sonar system can bedisabled by pushing the OFF switch. Whenthe system is disabled, the indicator lighton the switch will illuminate. Push theswitch again to enable the system. The in-dicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset thenext time the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Frontand rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Tow mode should be used when pulling aheavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driv-ing the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will notcause any damage. However, fueleconomy may be reduced and thetransmission/engine driving characteris-tics may feel unusual.

Push the tow mode switch to activate towmode. The TOW indicator will come onwhen tow mode is selected. Push the towmode switch again to turn the tow modeoff.

Tow mode is automatically canceled whenthe key is turned off.

For additional information, refer to “Towmode” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

LIC2111

TOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped)


12V OUTLET(s)The power outlets are for powering electri-cal accessories such as cellular tele-phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)maximum.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

The power outlets on the instrument paneland the 3rd row (if so equipped) are pow-ered only when the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position.

The power outlet inside the console (if soequipped) is powered directly by the vehi-cle’s battery.

CAUTION∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-signed for use with a cigarette lighterunit. Do not use any other power out-let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for additional information.

12v Instrument PanelLIC2076

12v 3rd Row (if so equipped)LIC2199

12v Center console (if so equipped)LIC2077

POWER OUTLETS


∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the enginerunning to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when theair conditioner, headlights or rear win-dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned off.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tem-perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

120v Center console (if so equipped)LIC2078

120v Rear luggage area (if so equipped)LIC2203


120V OUTLETS (if so equipped)

Before Drive (idling) (Park) When shifting out of Park When shifting back to(idling) (Park)

Switch Reset

Options What is plugged IN Indicator InverterStatus

Indicator InverterStatus



Nothing plugged in but switchis on

150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOTNECESSARY

NOTNECESSARY

Device<150W 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOTNECESSARY

NOTNECESSARY

150W>device<400W 150 and 400 ON OFF OFF ON ON 150 and 400 ONDevice>400W 150 and 400 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF** OFF**

** OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in. Therefore, the switch indicatorsand inverter would remain off. There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on, but once the inverter reaches its peak saturation point(temp and power level), it will shut off both the inverter and the switch indicators.


CAUTION∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Use power outlets with the enginerunning to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

∙ Do not use double adaptors or morethan one electrical accessory.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when theair conditioner, headlights or rear win-dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned off.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tem-perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS SEAT POCKET (if so equipped)The seat pocket is located on the front cor-ner of the driver’s seat. The pocket can beused to store small items.

WARNINGDo not store angular, sharp, heavy ob-jects or objects that cannot fully fit in-side the pouch because they might in-crease the likelihood of an injury in acrash.

LIC2082 LIC2083

STORAGE


UNDER-SEAT STORAGETo open the drawer, lift up slightly and pullto open. To remove the drawer, pull to thepoint of resistance and lift up and pull.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the tray under theseat, cargo in the trays should not ex-ceed 20 pounds (9.08kg).

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGETRAYS

The long storage tray can be used to storebusiness cards.

WARNINGDo not place sharp objects in the traysto help prevent injury in an accident orsudden stop.

Driver side onlyLIC2067

Instrument panelLIC2069

Lower center consoleLIC2070


GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle.

WARNINGKeep the glove box lid closed while driv-ing to help prevent injury in an accidentor a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)The front of the console box lid �1 has aplace for securing items with metal clips.

LIC2068 LIC2086


The tray located in the front of the consolebox is for storing binders.

Removable center consoleTo remove the center console:

1. Stop the vehicle and place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position.

2. Lift out tray.

3. Unplug all accessories from the outlets.

4. Remove the four bolts located insidethe console and two in the front stor-age tray.

Binder storage trayLIC2115 LIC2087 LIC2100


5. Disconnect the power supply. The con-nector may need to be accessed fromthe driver’s door side of the seat byreaching underneath the seat.

6. The harness cap (if so equipped) istaped to the harness underneath theinside of the center console. Removethe tape to remove the cap.

For customers without a 120V outlet, pro-ceed to step 8.

7. Install the cap to the harness connec-tor located at the bottom corner of thedriver’s seat.

8. Securely tighten the bolts to the vehicleafter the console is removed.

WARNINGReinstall bolts in the floor mountingholes to prevent water intrusion and re-duce the chance for carbon monoxideto get into the occupant compartment.

LIC2102 LIC2101 LIC2103


CAUTIONProperly stow and secure the console ifit is not stored outside the vehicle.

To install the center console:

1. Stop the vehicle and place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position.

2. Remove the six bolts from the floormounting holes.

For customers without a 120V outlet, pro-ceed to step 5.

3. Remove the cap from the harness con-nector located at the bottom corner ofthe driver’s seat and place the cap inthe glove box for future use.

4. Connect the harness from the consoleto the connector at the bottom of thedriver’s seat. This may need to be ac-cessed from the driver’s door side ofthe seat by reaching underneath theseat.

5. Securely tighten the six bolts (the fourbolts located inside the console andthe two in the front storage tray).

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSESSTORAGETo open the sunglasses holder, push andrelease.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in theholder.

WARNINGKeep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to avoid obstructing thedriver’s view and to help prevent anaccident.

CAUTION∙ Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

LIC3387


CUP HOLDERS WARNINGAvoid abrupt starting and brakingwhen the cup holder is being used toprevent spilling the drink. If the liquid ishot, it can scald you or your passenger.

Each row is equipped with one or twomoveable under seat mounted cup hold-ers. To use, pull out from below the seat.

CAUTION∙ Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Instrument panelLIC2071

Center console (if so equipped)LIC2072

Under seat cup holdersLIC4086


CAUTION∙ Do not use the bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrownabout in the vehicle and possibly in-jure people during sudden braking oran accident.

∙ Do not use the bottle holder for openliquid containers.

STORAGE BINFront row — bottle holder

LIC29813rd row — bottle holder

LIC2201Map pocket — passenger area

LIC2200


GROCERY HOOKSThe grocery hooks are located on the backof the passenger’s seat. The grocery hooksallow for standard size plastic grocery bagsto hang side by side.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the hooks do notapply a total load of more than 18 lbs.(8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehiclewhile it is in motion and before closingthe windows. Use the window lockswitch to prevent unexpected use ofthe power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do not leavechildren, people who require the as-sistance of others or pets unattendedin your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-perature inside a closed vehicle on awarm day can quickly become highenough to cause a significant risk ofinjury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition switch is placed in the ON position orfor a period of time after the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position. If the driver’sor passenger’s door is opened during thisperiod of time, the power to the windows iscanceled.

1. Power door lock switch2. Front passenger side3. Window lock button4. Driver side automatic switchDriver’s side power windowswitchThe driver’s side control panel is equippedwith switches to open or close both frontwindows.

To open a window, push the switch andhold it down. To close a window, pull theswitch and hold it up. To stop the openingor closing function at any time, simply re-lease the switch.

LIC2066 LIC2084

WINDOWS


Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operatesonly the corresponding passenger’s win-dow. To open the window, push the switchand hold it down �1 . To close the window,pull the switch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock switch is pushed,only the driver’s side window can beopened or closed. Push it again to cancelthe window lock function.

Automatic operationTo fully open a window equipped with au-tomatic operation, push the windowswitch down to the second detent and re-lease it; it need not be held. The windowautomatically opens all the way. To stopthe window, lift the switch up while the win-dow is opening.

MANUAL VENT WINDOWSTo open a manual vent window, pull each ofthe latch handles up until released.

To lock the window in the open position,push the latch handles down until locked inplace.

To close a manual vent window, pull thelatch handles up and to the inside of thevehicle, then push the latches down untilthey lock.

LIC0718 LIC0410 LIC2104


The interior lights have a three-positionswitch and operate regardless of ignitionswitch position.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 ,the interior lights illuminate, regardless ofdoor position. The lights will go off after aperiod of time unless the ignition switch isin the ON position.

When the switch is in the center position�2 , the interior lights will stay on for a periodof time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, akey, or the power door lock switch (if soequipped) while all doors are closedand the ignition switch is in the OFFposition.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and thenclosed while the key is removed fromthe ignition switch.

∙ The key is removed from the ignitionswitch while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer isactivated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob(if so equipped), a key, or the power doorlock switch (if so equipped).

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

The lights will turn off automatically after aperiod of time while doors are open to pre-vent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

When the switch is in the OFF position �3 ,the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-less of door position.

CAUTIONDo not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

LIC0792

INTERIOR LIGHTS


MAP LIGHTSTo turn the map lights on, push theswitches. To turn them off, push theswitches again.

CAUTIONDo not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

CARGO LIGHTThe cargo light on the overhead trim has athree-position switch. To operate, push theswitch to the desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illumi-nates when any door is opened or un-locked by the key fob. The light turns offafter a period of time when all doors areclosed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regard-less of door position or lock status.

LIC0790 LIC0590


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6Operating the sliding door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Back doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to use remote keyless entrysystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Storage clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Manual anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

1. Two master keys2. Transponder chip (if so equipped)3. Key number plateA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safeplace (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle.If you lose your keys, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not re-cord key numbers so it is very important tokeep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when youhave lost all keys and do not have one to makea duplicate. If you still have a key, it can beduplicated without knowing the key number.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)You can only drive your vehicle using thekeys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System componentsin your vehicle.

A mechanical key can be used for all thelocks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-isting key can be duplicated without know-ing the key number. As many as fourNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keyscan be used with one vehicle. You shouldbring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem keys that you have to a NISSAN dealerfor registration. This is because the regis-tration process will erase the memory of allkey codes previously registered into theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Afterthe registration process, these compo-nents will only recognize keys coded intothe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemduring registration. Any key that is not

given to the dealer at the time of registra-tion will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

CAUTIONDo not allow the immobilizer systemkey, which contains an electrical tran-sponder, to come into contact withwater or salt water. This could affectsystem function.

LPD0348

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors cannot beopened using the inside or outside doorhandles. The doors must be unlocked toopen the doors.

WARNING∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from unintention-ally opening the doors, and will helpkeep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do not leavechildren, people who require the as-sistance of others or pets unattendedin your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-perature inside a closed vehicle on awarm day can quickly become highenough to cause a significant risk ofinjury or death to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH KEYTo lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key asshown.

Manual or Power (without vehiclesecurity system) (if so equipped)To lock a door, turn the key toward the frontof the vehicle �1 . To unlock, turn the keytoward the rear �2 .

Driver’s and sliding doorsLPD0349

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Rear door

Turning the key toward the left �1 of thevehicle locks the rear doors.

Turning the key to the right �2 of the vehicleunlocks the rear doors.

Power (with vehicle securitysystem) (if so equipped)The power door lock system with vehiclesecurity system allows you to lock all doorsat the same time.

Driver’s and sliding doors

Turning the key toward the front �1 of thevehicle locks all the doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear�2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. Fromthat position, returning the key to neutral�3 (where the key can only be removed andinserted) and turning it toward the rearagain within 5 seconds unlocks all doors�4 .

Rear door

Turning the key toward the left �1 of thevehicle locks all the doors.

Turning the key one time toward the right�2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. Fromthat position, returning the key to neutral�3 (where the key can only be removed andinserted) and turning it toward the rightagain within 5 seconds unlocks all doors�4 .

LPD2671 LPD0483 LPD2670


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOBTo lock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the lock position �1 ,then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, movethe inside lock knob to the unlock position�2 .

To lock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the lock position �2 ,then close the door.


To lock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the lock position �1 ,then close the door.


To open the door from the inside, pull theinside door handle toward you.

Inside lock – front doorsLPD2000

Inside lock – sliding doorLPD2003

Inside lock – back doorLPD2001


LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passen-ger’s side) to the lock position �1 . Whenlocking the door this way, be certain not toleave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, pushthe door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-senger’s side) to the unlock position �2 .

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’sor front passenger’s side) is moved to thelock position with the key in the ignitionswitch while any door is open, all doors willlock and then unlock automatically. Thishelps to prevent the keys from being acci-dently locked inside the vehicle.

OPERATING THE SLIDING DOORThe sliding door can be opened from theinside or the outside.

To open the sliding door from the inside,pull the release lever �1 down and pull thehandle �2 toward the rear of the vehicleuntil the door clicks. This will lock the doorinto an open position.

To close the sliding door from the insidepull the release lever �1 down. The door willrelease from the open position. Slide thedoor forward to close.

Driver’s and passenger’s sideWPD0381

Right side onlyLPD2002


To open a sliding door from the outside, pullout the outside handle and slide the doortoward the rear of the vehicle until the doorclicks. The door will lock into an open posi-tion.

To close the sliding door from the outside,pull the outside handle again. The door willrelease from the open position and slideclosed.

BACK DOORS

CAUTIONDo not operate the 243° release leveruntil the door has been fully opened.Doing so can result in damage to thevehicle and/or malfunction of themechanism.

Open the back doors by performing thefollowing:

1. From the outside of the vehicle, pull thedoor handle on the right side door to-ward you and open door until it stops.

2. Lift the lever �A on the side of the leftback door and pull the door to openuntil the door stops �1 .

LPD2051


The back doors open approximately 243°to allow access to the rear of the vehicle.

3. To open either door to the wide openposition �2 pull the release lever �B to-ward the back door and release thecheck link arm �C .

4. Open the door slowly until the mag-netic door stopper connects to thestop pad on the outside of the vehicle.Do not use the stopper as a step.

5. To close the doors from the outside,close the left door until it latches, thenclose the right door until it latches.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 mph(24 km/h).

∙ All doors unlock automatically when thetransmission is placed in the P (Park)position, when the ignition is turned tothe OFF position, or when the key is re-moved from the ignition.

CHILD SAFETY SLIDING DOORLOCKThe child safety lock helps prevent the slid-ing door from being opened accidentally,especially when small children are in thevehicle.The child safety lock lever is located on theedge of the sliding door.When the lever is in the unlock position, thedoor can be opened from the outside orthe inside.When the lever is in the LOCK position,the door can be opened only from theoutside.

LPD2009 LPD2050




∙ The remote keyless entry key fobtransmits radio waves when the but-tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-tion and communication systems. Donot operate the remote keyless entrykey fob while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated un-intentionally when the unit is storedfor a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turnthe interior light on, and activate the panicalarm by using the key fob from outside thevehicle.

Some settings for the key fob, such as hornbeep, can be adjusted. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Silencing the horn beepfeature” in this section.

Be sure to remove the key from the ve-hicle before locking the doors.

The key fob can operate at a distance ofapproximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.The effective distance depends upon theconditions around the vehicle.

As many as five key fobs can be used withone vehicle. For information concerningthe purchase and use of additional keyfobs, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer.

The key fob will not function when:

∙ The battery is discharged.

∙ The distance between the vehicle andthe key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate whenthe key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTIONListed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the key fob:

∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con-tains electrical components, to comeinto contact with water or salt water.This could affect the system function.

∙ Do not drop the key fob.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharplyagainst another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. Ifthe key fob gets wet, immediatelywipe until it is completely dry.

∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-tended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C)

∙ Do not attach the key fob with a keyholder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field,such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of thatkey fob. This will prevent the key fobfrom unauthorized use to unlock thevehicle. For information regarding theerasing procedure, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM


HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

1. (lock) button

2. (unlock) button

3. (panic) button

Locking doors1. Close all windows.


3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the key fob.All the doors lock. The hazard warninglights flash twice and the horn beepsonce to indicate all doors are locked.

∙ When the button is pressedwith all doors locked, the hazard warn-ing lights flash twice and the hornbeeps once as a reminder that thedoors are already locked.

∙ If a door is open and you pressthe button, the doors will lockbut the horn will not beep and the haz-ard warning lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For addi-tional information, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” in this section.

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the key fob once.

∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once ifall doors are completely closed with theignition switch in any position exceptthe ON position.

∙ The interior lights turn on and the lighttimer activates for a period of timewhen the interior light switch is in theDOOR position with the ignition switchin any position except the ON position.

Press the button on the key fob againwithin 1 minute.

∙ All doors unlock.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once ifall doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off withoutwaiting by inserting the key into the ignitionswitch and placing it in the ON or STARTposition, locking the doors with the key fobor pushing the interior light switch to theOFF position.

Auto relock (if so equipped)When the button on the key fob ispressed, all doors will lock automaticallywithin 1 minute unless one of the followingoperations is performed:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switchand the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

LPD3502


Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the panic alarm tocall attention by pressing and holdingthe button on the key fob for longerthan 0.5 seconds.The panic alarm and headlights will stay onfor a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time.

∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior lightsPress the button on the key fob onceto turn on the interior lights.For additional information, refer to “Interiorlights” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can bedeactivated using the key fob.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.The hazard warning lights will flash threetimes to confirm that the horn beep fea-ture has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.The hazard warning lights will flash onceand the horn will sound once to confirmthat the horn beep feature has been reac-tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature doesnot silence the horn if the alarm is trig-gered.


1. Pull the hood lock release handle �1located below the driver side instru-ment panel. The hood will spring upslightly.

2. Push the lever �2 at the front of thehood to the side as illustrated with yourfingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly andmake sure it locks into place.

WARNING∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause the hoodto fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke comingfrom the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOORPull on the finger tab to open.

LPD2006 LPD2005

HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR


FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seri-ously injured if it is misused or mis-handled. Always stop the engine anddo not smoke or allow open flamesor sparks near the vehicle whenrefueling.

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refuelingmay cause fuel overflow, resulting infuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed forproper operation of the fuel systemand emission control system. An in-correct cap can result in a serious mal-function and possible injury. It couldalso cause the Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyto attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portablefuel containers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you arefilling it.

– Use only approved portable fuelcontainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information,refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-pear if the fuel-filler cap is not prop-erly tightened. It may take a few driv-ing trips for the message to bedisplayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSEFUEL CAP warning appears may causethe Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) to illuminate.

LPD2668


∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-nate. If the light illuminates be-cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after afew driving trips. If the light doesnot turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

NOTE:

Changing ignition switch status duringthe refueling process may cause a delayin fuel gauge response.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-wise to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook�1 while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into thefuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until asingle click is heard.

LOOSE FUEL CAP warningThe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears inthe trip computer when the fuel-filler cap isnot tightened correctly after the vehiclehas been refueled. It may take a few drivingtrips for the message to be displayed. Toturn off the warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap assoon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

LPD2669 LPD2008


3. Press the INFO knob �A on the instru-ment panel located behind the steer-ing wheel for about one second to turnoff the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning �Bafter tightening the fuel-filler cap.

TILT OPERATION

WARNING∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary forproper steering operation and com-fort. The driver’s air bag inflates withgreat force. If you are unrestrained,leaning forward, sitting sideways orout of position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the air bag if youare up against it when it inflates. Al-ways sit back against the seatbackand as far away as practical from thesteering wheel. Always use the seatbelts.

Pull the lock lever toward the driver andhold it to adjust the steering wheel up ordown to the desired position.

Release the lock lever to lock the steeringwheel in place.

LPD2012

STEERING WHEEL


1. To block out glare from the front, swingdown the sun visor �1 .

2. To block glare from the side, discon-nect the sun visor from the centermount and swing it to the side �2 .

STORAGE CLIPTo access the storage clip, pull the sun visordown. Insert items such as business cards,directions, etc. under the clip. Do not viewinformation while operating the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEWMIRROR (if so equipped)Use the night position �1 to reduce glarefrom the headlights of vehicles behind youat night.

Use the day position �2 when driving indaylight hours.

WARNINGUse the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear viewclarity.

LPD2021

Driver’s and passenger’s sideLPD2007 WPD0126

SUN VISORS MIRRORS


AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it au-tomatically dims during night time condi-tions and according to the intensity of theheadlights of the vehicle following you. Theautomatic anti-glare feature is activatedwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-sors �1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivityof the sensors, resulting in improper op-eration.

The indicator light �2 will illuminate whenthe automatic anti-glare feature is operat-ing.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON po-sition, press the button as described:

∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, pressand hold the button for 8 sec-onds. The indicator light will turn off.

∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressand hold the button again for8 seconds. The indicator light will turnon.

For information on the compass display �3(if so equipped), refer to “Compass display”in the “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

LPD2315


OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNINGObjects viewed in the convex portion ofthe mirror are closer than they appear.Be careful when changing lanes or turn-ing. Using only the convex mirror couldcause an accident. Use the other mir-rors or glance over your shoulder toproperly judge distances to otherobjects.

Use the outside mirror remote control toadjust the top portion of the mirror.

The lower portion of the mirror can bemoved manually in any direction for a bet-ter rear view.

Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to ex-tend it to the desired position for bettervisibility while towing a trailer.

WARNINGDo not extend or retract mirrors whiledriving. You may lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

CAUTIONDriving in tight spaces with mirrors ex-tended may cause damage to thevehicle.

Type A (if so equipped)LPD2017

Type B (Trailer tow) (if so equipped)LPD0279

Trailer tow extensionLPD0268


Electric control typeThe outside mirror remote control will op-erate only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch �1 to select the rightor left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de-sired position using the large switch �2 .Move the small switch �1 to the center(neutral) position to prevent accidentallymoving the mirror.

Manual folding outside mirrorsPull the outside mirror toward the door tofold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated todefrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-ibility. For additional information, refer to“Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD0237Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2019Type B (Trailer tow) (if so equipped)

LPD0269


MEMO


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems

Control panel buttons — models withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9How to use the VOL (volume) knob /PUSH (power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Control panel buttons — models withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13How to use the button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL(volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . 4-17How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Difference between predicted andactual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-21System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Heater and air conditioner (manual)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-38Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

FM/AM radio (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45FM/AM/SAT radio with Compact Disc(CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50USB (Universal Serial Bus) connectionport (models without NavigationSystem) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57USB (Universal Serial Bus) connectionport (models with Navigation System)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60iPod®* player operation withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-62iPod®* player operation with NavigationSystem (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Bluetooth® streaming audio withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-69Bluetooth® streaming audio withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-71CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . . 4-73Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . . 4-75Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwithout Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-76

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83Phone display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-99

Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

NISSAN Voice Recognition System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemvoice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . 4-108Audio system voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108Information voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108My Apps voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108Help voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109

WARNING∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-

ditioning controls and display con-trols should not be done while drivingin order that full attention may begiven to the driving operation.

∙ Do not disassemble or modify thissystem. If you do, it may result in acci-dents, fire, or electrical shock.

∙ Do not use this system if you noticeany abnormality, such as a frozenscreen or lack of sound. Continueduse of the system may result in acci-dent, fire or electric shock.

∙ In case you notice any foreign objectin the system hardware, spill liquid onit, or notice smoke or smell comingfrom it, stop using the system imme-diately. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

1. MENU button

2. button*

3. Display screen

4. (brightness control) button

5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH(power) button

* For additional information regarding theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemcontrol button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-

LHA4680

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Free Phone System without NavigationSystem” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning for a long time, it will dischargethe battery, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes referto a key shown only on the display. Thesekeys can be selected by touching thescreen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION∙ The glass display screen may break if

it is hit with a hard or sharp object. Ifthe glass screen breaks, do not touchit. Doing so could result in an injury.

∙ To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

∙ Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Con-tact with liquid will cause the systemto malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functionscannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not avail-able while driving will be “grayed out” ormuted.

WARNING∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

∙ Avoid using vehicle features thatcould distract you. If distracted, youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.

LHA4700

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen operation

Menu Item ResultSelecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ” key to

return to the previous screen.Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “�” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one

item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123 Touch to manually enter numbers.OK Completes the character input.


Touch-screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry,soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-gent with a soft cloth. Never spray thescreen with water or detergent. Dampenthe cloth first and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO USE THE MENUBUTTONTo select and/or adjust several functions,features and modes that are available foryour vehicle:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA4706 LHA4700


Menu item ResultSettings Touch to change the following steps.

Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For addi-tional information, refer to “USB connections screen” and “Bluetooth® connections screen” in thissection.

Phone For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without NavigationSystem” in this section.

Sound For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.Volume & Beeps For additional information, refer to “Volume & beeps” in this section.Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings.

On-screen Clock Touch to toggle on or off the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12 hour or 24 hour format.Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjust the daylight saving time to on or off.Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the

minutes.System Voice For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional

options will appear.Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer to “Adjusting

the screen” in this section.Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.Return All Settings To Default Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.


(brightness control) BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button againwill change the display to the day or thenight display.Press and hold the button for morethan 2 seconds to turn the display off. Pressand hold the button again to turn the dis-play on.

HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)KNOB / PUSH (power)BUTTONPress the PUSH (power) button toturn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.

SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCHBARVarious system functions can be accessedby touching the items on the Launch Bar�1 which is displayed on most of the mainmenu screens (the Launch Bar does notappear on some screens such as settingsscreens, camera screens, etc.)

Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to dis-play the corresponding menu screens.

The following menu items are available onthe Launch Bar:

∙ AM

∙ FM

∙ USB/iPod

∙ Bluetooth

∙ AUX

∙ Settings

LHA4707


1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

3. button**

4. button

5. (brightness control) button

6. BACK button

7. PUSH/AUDIO button / TUNE knob

8. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) controlknob

9. CAMERA button

10. NAV button*

* For additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manualregarding the Navigation System controlbuttons.

** For additional information, refer to the“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwith Navigation System” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will discharge the battery, andthe engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes referto a key shown only on the display. Thesekeys can be selected by touching thescreen.LHA3138

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —MODELS WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)


HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION∙ The glass display screen may break if

it is hit with a hard or sharp object. Ifthe glass screen breaks, do not touchit. Doing so could result in an injury.

∙ To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

∙ Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Con-tact with liquid will cause the systemto malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functionscannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not avail-able while driving will be grayed out ormuted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and thenoperate the navigation system.

WARNING∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

∙ Avoid using vehicle features thatcould distract you. If distracted, youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.

Touch-screen operationLHA3748


Menu Item ResultSelecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to

return to the previous screen.Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “�” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page.

Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page.Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.Space Inserts a space.Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the

characters.OK Completes the character input.

Touch-screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry,soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-gent with a soft cloth. Never spray thescreen with water or detergent. Dampenthe cloth first and then wipe the screen.


HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTONPress the BACK button to return to the pre-vious screen.

HOW TO USE THE BUTTONFor additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manualregarding the “SiriusXM® Travel Link” and“SiriusXM® Traffic” features.

For additional information, refer to“NissanConnect® Mobile Apps” in this sec-tion.

For additional information, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition System” in this section.

To select and/or adjust several functions,features and modes that are available foryour vehicle:

1. Press the [ ] button.


3. Touch the desired item.

LHA2773 LHA3748


Menu item ResultAudio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.Traffic Touch this key display the traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will

appear.Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes

are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock Touch this key to adjust the time and date.Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.Date Format Select from five possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” al-

lows you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. Select a time zone using the “Time Zone” key.Set Clock Manually Adjust the clock manually. Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or

down. “Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.Daylight Savings Time Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.Color Adjust touch-screen color.


Menu item ResultTemperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key

on the screen is touched.System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up

message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for2 seconds.

Return to Factory Settings/ClearMemory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.Minimize Voice Feedback Touch this key to turn on or off the control voice feedback.System Software Version Touch this key to display software version information.

Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in thissection.

SXM Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information, refer to the “Audio System” inthis section.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button againwill change the display to auto or nightdisplay mode.If no operation is performed within 5 sec-onds, the display will return to the previousdisplay.

Press and hold the button for morethan 2 seconds to turn the display off. Pressthe button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE ON-OFFBUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROLKNOBPress the ON-OFF button to turn audiofunction on and off. Turn the volume con-trol knob to adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERABUTTONFor additional information, refer to “Rear-View Monitor” in this section.


1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)LHA4978

REARVIEW MONITOR


WARNINGFailure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the Rear-View Monitor system could result in se-rious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a conveniencefeature and is not a substitute forproper backing. Always turn and lookout the windows and check mirrors tobe sure that it is safe to move beforeoperating the vehicle. Always back upslowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in showing large stationaryobjects directly behind the vehicle, tohelp avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-hicle width line should be used as areference only when the vehicle is on alevel paved surface. The distanceviewed on the monitor is for referenceonly and may be different than theactual distance between the vehicleand displayed objects.

CAUTIONDo not scratch the camera lens whencleaning dirt or snow from the front ofthe camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-cally shows a rear view of the vehicle whenthe shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)position. While in R (Reverse), pressing theCAMERA button (if so equipped) will cyclethrough guideline options. The radio canstill be heard while the RearView Monitor isactive.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-tor system uses a camera located justabove the vehicle’s license plate �1 .

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMOPERATIONWith the ignition switch in the ON position,move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA5048


HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESGuiding lines which indicate the vehiclewidth and distances to objects with refer-ence to the vehicle body line �A are dis-played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line �1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line �2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line �3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines �4

Indicate the vehicle width when backingup.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTEDAND ACTUAL DISTANCESThe displayed guidelines and their loca-tions on the ground are for approximatereference only. Objects on uphill or downhillsurfaces or projecting objects will be actu-ally located at distances different fromthose displayed in the monitor relative tothe guidelines (refer to illustrations). Whenin doubt, turn around and view the objectsas you are backing up, or park and exit thevehicle to view the positioning of objectsbehind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphillWhen backing up the vehicle up a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown closer than the actualdistance. Note that any object on the hill isfurther than it appears on the monitor.

LHA4754

LHA5035


Backing up on a steep downhillWhen backing up the vehicle down a hill,the distance guide lines and the vehiclewidth guide lines are shown farther thanthe actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on themonitor.

Backing up near a projectingobjectThe vehicle may seem to nearly clear theobject in the display. However, the vehiclemay hit the object if it projects over theactual backing up course.

LHA5036 LHA4757


Backing up behind a projectingobjectThe position �C is shown farther than theposition �B in the display. However, the po-sition �C is actually at the same distance asthe position �A . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position �Aif the object projects over the actual back-ing up course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREENThe procedure for adjusting the displaysettings of the screen differs depending onthe type of screen present on the vehicle.

For vehicles without Navigation System

1. While on the main menu screen, touchthe “Settings” key.

2. Touch the “Camera” key.

3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Tint”“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

LHA5037

Models without Navigation SystemLHA3522


4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “-”key on the touch-screen display.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of theRearView Monitor while the vehicle ismoving.

For vehicles with Navigation System

1. Firmly apply the brake and place theshift lever in R (Reverse)

2. Press the button on the controlpanel.

3. The screen will display the Night set-tings.

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-ting up or down.

5. Press the button again to accessthe Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-ting up or down.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of theRearView Monitor while the vehicle ismoving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMLIMITATIONS

WARNINGListed below are the system limitationsfor RearView Monitor. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-nate blind spots and may not showevery object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-ner areas of the bumper cannot beviewed on the RearView Monitor be-cause of its monitoring range limita-tion. The system will not show smallobjects below the bumper, and maynot show objects close to the bumperor on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance be-cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor willappear visually opposite compared towhen viewed in the rearview and out-side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.The lines are highly affected by thenumber of occupants, fuel level, ve-hicle position, road conditions androad grade.

∙ Make sure that the rear doors are se-curely closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled above the license plate.

Models with Navigation SystemLHA5033


∙ When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causingwater condensation on the lens, amalfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it maymalfunction or cause damage result-ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations anddo not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremelyhigh or low, the screen may not clearlydisplay objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects onthe screen. This is due to strong re-flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearViewMonitor may differ somewhat from theactual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not beclear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switchingbetween views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on thecamera, the RearView Monitor may notdisplay objects clearly. Clean the cam-era.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.Wipe off any wax with a clean clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaningagent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will causediscoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

LHA5048


If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on thecamera �1 , the RearView Monitor may notdisplay objects clearly. Clean the cameraby wiping it with a cloth dampened with adiluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-ing it with a dry cloth.

Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventslides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial.Move the dial toward the to open thevents or toward the to close them.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents byopening, closing or rotating.

These vents are only operational when therear fan speed control dial is at a settingother than 0 and the rear temperaturecontrol dial is at a setting other than hot.

For additional information, refer to “Rearseat air conditioner” in this section.

Front (side and center)LHA2065

Rear (ceiling)LHA2130

VENTS


The air flow from the floor vents locatedbeneath the driver’s and front passenger’sseats cannot be adjusted or closed. Thesevents are only operational when theair flow control button is selected.For additional information, refer to “Air flowcontrol buttons” in this section.

The air flow from the floor vents locatedbeneath the second and third row passen-ger’s seats cannot be adjusted or closed.These vents are only operational when therear fan speed control dial is at a settingother than 0 and the rear temperaturecontrol dial is at a setting other than cold.


WARNING∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine isrunning.

∙ Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

Floor (beneath driver’s and frontpassenger’s seats)

LHA2128Floor (beneath 2nd and 3rd rows)

LHA2129

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (if so equipped)


NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-hicle can build up in the air condi-tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-senger compartment through thevents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

1. Fan speed control dial

2. Front window defroster button

3. Rear window and outside mirror(if so equipped) defroster switch

4. Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial

6. MAX A/C button

7. Air flow control buttons

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

Fan speed control dial

The fan speed control dial turns thefan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttonsThe air flow control buttons allow you toselect the air flow outlets.MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling(air conditioning).

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

LHA2037


— Air flows from center and sidevents and the front flooroutlets.

— Air flows mainly from the frontfloor outlets and the vents lo-cated beneath the driver’sand front passenger’s seat.

— Air flows from defroster out-lets and the front floor outlets.

— Air flows mainly from de-froster outlets.


Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you toadjust the temperature of the outlet air. Tolower the temperature, turn the dial to theleft. To increase the temperature, turn thedial to the right.

Air recirculation buttonPress the button to recirculate air in-side the vehicle.

Press the button to the on positionwhen:

∙ driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from enteringpassenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using theair conditioner.

The air recirculation mode is only func-tional when the air flow control mode is inthe following positions: ,or .Press the button to turn air recircula-tion off. Outside air is drawn into the pas-senger compartment and distributedthrough the selected outlet.The mode is not necessary for nor-mal heater or air conditioner operation.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position andpress the button to turn on the airconditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,press the button again.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror(if so equipped) defroster switchFor additional information, refer to “Rearwindow and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATIONHeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air tothe foot outlets. Some air also flows fromthe defrost outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-tion for normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial tothe desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial tothe desired position between themiddle and the hot position.


VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the sideand center vents.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-tion.



4. Turn the temperature control dial tothe desired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrostoutlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the front defroster button.



∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from thewindows, turn the fan speed con-trol dial to the highest setting and thetemperature control to the full HOT po-sition.

∙ When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on ifthe outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off,allowing outside air to be drawn into thepassenger compartment to further im-prove the defogging performance. Therecirculation mode cannot be activatedin the position.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air tothe side and center vents and to the frontand rear floor outlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogsthe windshield.




∙ When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on ifthe outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off,allowing outside air to be drawn into thepassenger compartment to further im-prove the defogging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield.This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position.The button will illuminate. When theair conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidi-fying functions are added to the heateroperation.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidifythe air.



3. Turn the fan speed control dial tothe desired position. The buttonwill illuminate.


∙ For quick cooling when the outsidetemperature is high, press thebutton to the ON position. Be sure toreturn the button to the OFF posi-tion for normal cooling. The indicatorlight on the button will go off. Youmay also select MAX A/C for quick cool-ing.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidifythe air.



3. Turn the fan speed control dial tothe desired position. The buttonwill illuminate.


Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windowsand dehumidify the air.



∙ When the or are selected,the air conditioner automatically turnson if the outside temperature is morethan 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off,allowing outside air to be drawn into thepassenger compartment to further im-prove the defogging performance.

∙ The air conditioner is always on inmode, regardless of whether the indica-tor light is on or off.


Operating tips∙ Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or3 minutes with the windows open tovent hot air from the passenger com-partment. Then, close the windows.This allows the air conditioner to coolthe interior more quickly.

∙ The air conditioning system shouldbe operated for approximately10 minutes at least once a month.This helps prevent damage to thesystem due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe ventilators in hot, humid conditionsas the air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.


∙ If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. For additionalinformation, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button anddial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICKheating, cooling or defrosting. For addi-tional information on heating and cooling,refer to “Heater and air conditioner” in thissection. The air recirculation ( )mode should always be OFF for heatingand defrosting.

LHA2039


LHA2040 LHA2131


LHA2042 LHA4494


WARNING∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine isrunning.

∙ Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controlsto activate the air conditioner.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-hicle can build up in the air condi-tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-senger compartment through thevents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)


CONTROLS1. Driver temperature control dial

2. A/C (ON/OFF) button

3. Front window defroster button

4. Fan speed control dial

5. (System OFF) button

6. Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch

7. Air recirculation button

8. Passenger temperature control dial

9. DUAL button

10. Air flow control buttons

11. AUTO button

AUTOMATIC OPERATIONCooling or heating (auto)This mode may be used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep aconstant temperature. Air flow distributionand fan speed are also controlled auto-matically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.Driver and passenger temperaturescan be set independently. Press DUALto activate dual climate control func-tions. Turn the passenger’s side tem-perature control dial to the left or rightto set the desired passenger’s tem-perature.

∙ Adjust the temperature dial to about75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ The temperature of the front passen-ger compartment will be maintainedautomatically. Air flow distribution, fanspeed and A/C on/off are also con-trolled automatically.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe vents in hot, humid conditions asthe air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF)The air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to setthe desired temperature.

LHA2468


∙ The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwise,the system may not work properly.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting ordefogging

1. Press the front window defrosterbutton to turn the system on. The indi-cator light in the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outsideof the windows, turn the manual fancontrol to the maximum position.

∙ As soon as possible after the wind-shield is clean, press the AUTO button toreturn to the auto mode.

∙ When the control is activated, theair conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperaturesabove 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than 1 minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until thefan control is turned OFF, the vehicle isshut off or the A/C button is used toturn off the compressor even if an airflow button other than is se-lected. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. The air re-circulation mode automatically turnsoff, allowing outside air to be drawn intothe passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATIONFan speed control dialTurn the fan speed control dial left orright to manually control the fan speed orturn the system on or off.Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you toadjust the temperature of the outlet air. Tolower the temperature, turn the dial to theleft. To increase the temperature, turn thedial to the right. Temperature can be ad-justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side.

Air recirculationPress the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehicle.Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic mode.The air recirculation button will not be acti-vated when the air conditioner is in DEF,floor, or floor/defrost mode.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine and press the but-ton to turn on the air conditioner. To turn offthe air conditioner, press the buttonagain.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


Air flow controlPress the air flow control buttons to manu-ally control air flow and select the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and front floor outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the frontfloor outlets and the vents lo-cated beneath the driver’s andfront passenger’s seat.

— Air flows from defroster andfloor outlets.

— Air flows from defrosteroutlets.


To turn system offPress the (System OFF) button.

Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switchFor additional information, refer to “Rearwindow and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS∙ When the engine coolant temperature

and outside air temperature are low, theair flow from the foot outlets may notoperate for a maximum of 150 seconds.However, this is not a malfunction. Afterthe coolant temperature warms up, airflow from the foot outlets will operatenormally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top ofthe instrument panel on the driver’s side�1 , helps the system maintain a constanttemperature. Do not put anything on oraround this sensor.

To operate the rear air conditioner, the en-gine must be running.

If the rear seat fan speed control dial is setto (0), the air conditioner is turned off. If it isset to any of the fan speed positions, air isdischarged from the rear vents at the cor-responding speed.

LHA2132

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER


1. Rear fan speed control dial2. Rear temperature control dial

CONTROLSFan speed control dialThe fan speed control dial turns the rearvent fan on and off and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial adjusts thetemperature and airflow of the outlet air.

Turn the dial to the left for cooler air or tothe right for warmer air.

When the temperature control dial isturned all the way to the cold setting, the airflows only from the ceiling vents. When thetemperature control dial is turned all theway to the hot setting, the air flows onlyfrom the floor vents beneath the secondand third row of seats. When the tempera-ture control dial is turned to a point be-tween the coldest and hottest settings, theair flows from both the floor and ceilingvents.

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricantis required when servicing your NISSAN airconditioner. Using improper refrigerants orlubricants will cause severe damage toyour air conditioner system. For additionalinformation, refer to “Air conditioner sys-tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer to service your “environmentallyfriendly” air conditioner system.

WARNINGThe air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

Rear seat rear climate controlsLHA2106

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER


RADIOWith the ignition placed in the ACC or ONposition, press the PUSH (power) orON•OFF button to turn the radio on. If youlisten to the radio with the engine not run-ning, the ignition should be placed in theACC position.Radio reception is affected by station sig-nal strength, distance from radio transmit-ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and otherexternal influences. Intermittent changesin reception quality normally are caused bythese external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio receptionYour NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-hance radio reception. These circuits aredesigned to extend reception range, and toenhance the quality of that reception.

However, there are some general charac-teristics of both FM and AM radio signalsthat can affect radio reception quality in amoving vehicle, even when the finestequipment is used. These characteristicsare completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantlychange because of vehicle movement.Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-ference from other vehicles can workagainst ideal reception. Described beloware some of the factors that can affect yourradio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers.Storing the device in a different locationmay reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 –30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (singlechannel) FM having slightly more rangethan stereo FM. External influences maysometimes interfere with FM station re-ception even if the FM station is within 25mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many ofthe same characteristics as light. For ex-ample, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves awayfrom a station transmitter, the signals willtend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-ence from buildings, large hills or due toantenna position (usually in conjunctionwith increased distance from the stationtransmitter), static or flutter can be heard.This can be reduced by adjusting the treblecontrol to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-tive characteristics of FM signals, direct andreflected signals reach the receiver at thesame time. The signals may cancel eachother, resulting in momentary flutter or lossof sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency,can bend around objects and skip alongthe ground. In addition, the signals can bebounced off the ionosphere and bent backto earth. Because of these characteristics,AM signals are also subject to interferenceas they travel from transmitter to receiver.

AUDIO SYSTEM


Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areaswith many tall buildings. It can also occurfor several seconds during ionospheric tur-bulence even in areas where no obstaclesexist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even trafficlights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the firsttime or the battery has been replaced, thesatellite radio may not work properly. Thisis not a malfunction. Wait more than10 minutes with satellite radio ON and thevehicle outside of any metal or large build-ing for satellite radio to receive all of thenecessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available un-less there is an active SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio service subscription. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Ifsatellite radio is not operational thenpressing the RADIO button will switch be-tween FM and AM bands.

Satellite radio performance may be af-fected if cargo carried on the roof blocksthe satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-lite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-mance. Remove the ice to restore satelliteradio reception.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONSLHA0099


Compact Disc (CD) player (if soequipped)

CAUTION∙ Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage theCD and/or CD player.

∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/orCD player.

∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

∙ During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to thehumidity. If this occurs, remove theCD and dehumidify or ventilate theplayer completely.

∙ The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

∙ The CD player sometimes cannotfunction when the compartmenttemperature is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

∙ CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with fin-gerprints may not work properly.

∙ The following CDs may not workproperly:

∙ Copy Control Compact Discs (CCCD)

∙ Recordable Compact Discs (CD-R)

∙ Rewritable Compact Discs (CD-RW)

∙ Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

∙ CDs that are not round

∙ CDs with a paper label

∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

∙ This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Removethe CD by pressing the EJECT button.After a short time, reinsert the CD.The CD can be played when the tem-perature of the player returns to nor-mal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audiosystem (only MP3 or WMA CD).


Compact disc with MP3 or WMA(if so equipped)Terms

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digitalaudio file format. This format allows fornear “CD quality” sound, but at a fractionof the size of normal audio files. MP3conversion of an audio track fromCD-ROM can reduce the file size by ap-proximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually noperceptible loss in quality. MP3 com-pression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal thatthe human ear doesn’t hear.

∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* isa compressed audio format created byMicrosoft as an alternative to MP3. TheWMA codec offers greater file compres-sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-age of more digital audio tracks in thesame amount of space when com-pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-ity.

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the numberof bits per second used by a digital mu-sic file. The size and quality of a com-pressed digital audio file is determinedby the bit rate used when encoding thefile.

∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-quency is the rate at which the samplesof a signal are converted from analog todigital (A/D conversion) per second.

∙ Multisession — Multisession is one ofthe methods for writing data to media.Writing data once to the media is calleda single session, and writing more thanonce is called a multisession.

∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA filethat contains information about thedigital music file such as song title, art-ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayedon the Artist/song title line on the dis-play.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-istered trademarks and trademarks in theUnited States of America and other coun-tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 orWMA files is as illustrated.

Playback order chartWHA1078


∙ The names of folders not containingMP3 or WMA files are not shown in thedisplay.

∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

∙ The playback order is the order in whichthe files were written by the writing soft-ware. Therefore, the files might not playin the desired order.

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is notsupported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM BigEndian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.


Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number ofcharacters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively longtime before the musicstarts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the musicstarts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might notmatch the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bitrate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately tothe next song whenplaying

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyrightprotection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play backin the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.


USB (Universal Serial Bus)connection port

WARNINGDo not connect, disconnect, or operatethe USB device while driving. Doing socan be a distraction. If distracted youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB devicetilted or up-side-down into the portmay damage the port. Make sure thatthe USB device is connected correctlyinto the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if soequipped) when pulling the USB de-vice out of the port. This could dam-age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a placewhere it can be pulled unintentionally.Pulling the cable may damage theport.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-vice. USB devices should be purchasedseparately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USBmemory devices. To format a USB device,use a personal computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for thefront seats plays only sound without im-ages for regulatory reasons, even when thevehicle is parked.

This system supports various USBmemory devices, USB hard drives andiPod® players. Some USB devices may notbe supported by this system.

∙ Partitioned USB devices may not playcorrectly.

∙ Some characters used in other lan-guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) maynot appear properly in the display. UsingEnglish language characters with a USBdevice is recommended.

General notes for USB use

∙ For additional information, refer to yourdevice manufacturer’s owner informa-tion regarding the proper use and careof the device.

Notes for iPod® use

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® maycause a check mark to be displayed onand off (flickering). Always make surethat the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-main in fast forward or rewind mode if itis connected during a seek operation. Inthis case, please manually reset theiPod®.

∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) willcontinue to fast-forward or rewind if it isdisconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appearwhen the Play Mode is changed whileusing an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the sameorder as they appear on an iPod®.

∙ Large video files cause slow responsesin an iPod®. The vehicle center displaymay momentarily black out, but willsoon recover.

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects largevideo files while in the shuffle mode, thevehicle center display may momen-tarily black out, but will soon recover.


Bluetooth® streaming audio∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-dio system.

∙ It is necessary to set up the wirelessconnection between a compatibleBluetooth® audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module before usingthe Bluetooth® audio.

∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®audio will vary depending on the de-vices. Make sure how to operate youraudio device before using it with thissystem.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stoppedunder the following conditions:

∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-FreePhone System.

∙ Checking the connection to thehands-free phone.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-vice in an area surrounded by metal orfar away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®module to prevent tone quality degra-dation and wireless connection disrup-tion.

∙ While an audio device is connectedthrough the Bluetooth® wireless con-nection, the battery power of the devicemay discharge quicker than usual.

∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is atrademark ownedby Bluetooth SIG,Inc. and licensedto Panasonic andBosch.


FM/AM RADIO (if so equipped)

1. MENU button

2. AUDIO button

3. Display screen

4. / (SEEK/TRACK) buttons

5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH(power) button

For additional information, refer to “Audiooperation precautions” regarding all opera-tion precautions in this section.

Audio main operationVOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power)buttonPlace the ignition switch in the ON positionand press the PUSH (power) buttonwhile the system is off to call up the mode(radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®)that was playing immediately before thesystem was turned off.To turn the system off, press thePUSH (power) button.Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with SpeedSensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

MENU button

Press the MENU button to show theMenu screen. Touch the “Settings” key onthe display, then touch the “Sound” key.

LHA4672


Sound SettingsBass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and

right speakers.Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system

as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting,the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching ”-”/”+”, “L”/”R”, or “R”/”F” keys.


AUDIO button

Push to display the audio screen. When thisbutton is pushed while the audio screen isnot displayed, the last audio source playedwill play.

AM/FM radio screen1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key

Touch to display the radio menuscreen.

2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped)Touch to manually enter a station.

3. Audio source indicatorIndicates the currently selected audiosource.

4. Reception information displayReception information currently avail-able such as frequency, station name,etc. is displayed.

5. Preset listTo listen to a preset station, touch thecorresponding station from the presetlist. If displayed, touch the “<” or “>” keysto scroll the preset list.

AM radio operation

Press the MENU button and touch the“AM” key or press the AUDIO button andselect AM on the bottom of the Launch Barto bring up the AM display screen.If another audio source is playing when the“AM” key is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and thelast radio station played will begin playing.

AM Menu

Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AMMenu screen options:

∙ SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touchthe “AM Menu” key on the radio screenand then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta-tions will be tuned from low to high fre-quencies and stop at each broadcast-ing station for several seconds.Touching the “SCAN” key again duringthis period of several seconds will stoptuning and the radio will remain tunedto that station.

LHA4708


∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scanand update the station list displayed onthe right side of the AM Menu screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the or buttons to tunefrom low to high or high to low frequenciesand to stop at the next broadcasting sta-tion.1 to 6 station memory operations

Up to six stations can be registered in thepreset list.

1. Select the AM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will bedisplayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,push or on the steering wheelbriefly or touch a preferred station on thepreset list on the radio screen.

FM radio operationPress the MENU button and touch the“FM” key or press the AUDIO button andselect FM on the bottom of the Launch Barto bring up the FM display screen.If another audio source is playing when the“FM” key is pressed, the audio source play-ing will automatically be turned off and thelast radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shownon the screen during FM stereo reception.When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,the radio automatically changes from ste-reo to monaural reception.

FM Menu

Touch the “FM Menu” key to display the FMMenu screen options:

∙ SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touchthe “FM Menu” key on the radio screenand then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta-tions will be tuned from low to high fre-quencies and stop at each broadcast-ing stations for several seconds.Touching the “SCAN” key again duringthis period of several seconds will stoptuning and the radio will remain tunedto that station.

∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up-date the station list displayed on theright side of the FM Menu screen.

∙ RDS Info: Radio station and song infor-mation can be displayed on the FM dis-play screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the or buttons to tunefrom low to high or high to low frequenciesand to stop at the next broadcasting sta-tion.1 to 12 station memory operations

Up to 12 stations can be registered in thepreset list.

1. Select the FM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will bedisplayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,push or on the steering wheelbriefly or touch a preferred station on thepreset list on the radio screen.


Auxiliary (AUX) devices operationConnecting auxiliary devices

Connect an AUX device into the AUX inputjack located on the center console belowthe heater and air conditioner controls.

The AUX input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portablecassette player, CD player, MP3 player orphone.

Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug inthe audio input jack. If a cable with a monoplug is used, the audio output may notfunction normally.

Activation and playing

Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUXcable to the AUX device and the AUX inputjack. Select AUX mode from the audiosource menu screen or by pressing theSource button on the steering wheel.

AUX screen

∙ Audio source indicatorIndicates that the AUX source is cur-rently playing.

∙ “Volume Setting” keysTouch one of the keys to select thesound output gain from Low, Mediumand High.

∙ AUX from Launch BarTouch to change from another sourceto AUX.

Additional featuresFor additional information, refer to “iPod®player operation without Navigation Sys-tem” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB(Universal Serial Bus) connection port(models without Navigation System)” in thissection.

For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-gation System” in this section.

Microsoft (WMA) Obligation ofLabelingAdditional Obligation of Labeling

This product is protected by certain intel-lectual property rights of MicrosoftCorporation and third parties. Use or distri-bution of such technology outside of thisproduct is prohibited without a licensefrom Microsoft or an authorized Microsoftsubsidiary and third parties.

LHA4709


FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if soequipped)

1. CD eject button

2. FM-AM button

3. AUX button

4. CD insert slot

5. Backward seek button andForward seek button

6. BACK button

7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob

8. Display screen

9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) controlknob

10. CD button

11. SXM button*

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the SXM button is pressed to accesssatellite radio stations unless optional sat-ellite receiver and antenna are installedand an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio servicesubscription is active. Satellite radio is notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

For additional information, refer to “Audiooperation precautions” regarding all opera-tion precautions in this section.

Audio main operationON-OFF button / VOL (volume) controlknob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the ON-OFF buttonwhile the system is off to call up the mode(radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB oriPod®) that was playing immediately beforethe system was turned off.

LHA2895


To turn the system off, press the ON-OFFbutton.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with SpeedSensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

Audio settings



3. Touch the “Audio” key.Use the touch-screen to adjust the follow-ing items to the desired setting:

AudioBass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the

speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “ 0 ” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the vol-ume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Avail-able options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust.When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to themain audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.


SXM settings

To view the SXM settings:



3. Touch the “SXM” key.The signal strength, activation status andother information are displayed on thescreen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change theband as follows:

AM →P1→ FM1 →FM→P2

If another audio source is playing when theFM·AM button is pressed, the audio sourceplaying will automatically be turned off andthe last radio station played will begin play-ing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shownon the screen during FM stereo reception.When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,the radio automatically changes from ste-reo to monaural reception.

SXM band select

Pressing the SXM button will change theband as follows:

SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite,if so equipped)

When the SXM button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,the radio will come on at the last stationplayed.

The last station played will also come onwhen the ON-OFF button is pressed to turnthe radio on.

*When the SXM button is pressed, the sat-ellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna areinstalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radiois not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXMbutton is pressed, the compact disc willautomatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the opera-tion can be controlled through the touch-screen. Touch the “Categories” key to dis-play a list of categories. Touch a categorydisplayed on the list to display optionswithin that category.

Tuning with the touch-screen

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can betuned using the touch-screen. To bring upthe visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on thelower right corner of the screen. A screenappears with a bar running from low fre-quencies on the left to high frequencies onthe right. Touch the screen at the locationof the frequency you wish to tune and thestation will change to that frequency. Toreturn to the regular radio display screen,touch the “OK” key.

Tuning with the TUNE knob

The radio can also be manually tuned us-ing the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode,turn the TUNE knob to the left for lowerfrequencies or to the right for higher fre-quencies. When in SXM mode, turn theTUNE knob to change the channel.


SEEK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press theor seek buttons to tune from low tohigh or high to low frequencies and to stopat the next broadcasting station.When in SXM mode, press theor seek buttons to change the cat-egory.

1 to 6 station memory operationsTwelve stations can be set for the FM band(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations canbe set for the AM band. Eighteen stationscan be set for the SXM band (six for SXM1, sixfor SXM2 & six SXM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2using the FM·AM select button orchoose the radio band SXM1, SXM2 &SXM3 using the SXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station usingmanual or seek tuning. Press and holdany of the desired station memory but-tons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then comeon and the sound will resume. Pro-gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if thefuse opens, the radio memory will be can-celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-tions.

Presets can also be selected by touchingthe desired preset number on the screen.

LHA2899


Smart Favorites Preset Setup(if so equipped)The Smart Favorites feature allows theuser to designate presets, within the SXM1,SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Fa-vorites. When any of the Smart Favoritepresets are selected, the current track onthat station will play from the beginning ofthe song.

To program a Smart Favorite preset:

1. Press the SXM button.

2. Touch the “Setup” key.

3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favor-ites.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select anavailable preset.

For additional information, refer to “1 to 6station memory operations” in this sectionregarding preset memory options.

NOTE:

• Smart Favorites will start functioningonly after the audio unit is turned on fora few minutes.• Tune Start is supported for musicchannels only.

Replay Screen

The Replay Screen gives the user the abilityto replay, skip, pause or rewind the cur-rently aired track.

When the “Replay” key is touched, the Re-play Screen is prompted.

LHA3085 LHA3087


REPLAY To replay a track fromthe beginning, press the“ ” key. The user cancontinue to press the“ ” key to replay pre-vious songs, but can onlygo back as far as thesystem permits. The sys-tem will warn the userwhen they cannot skipany further back by dis-playing “At the End” in thebottom left corner of thescreen.

SKIP To skip a track, press the“ ” key. “Live” will ap-pear in the bottom leftcorner of the screen indi-cating the differencefrom play time to liveaudio.

PAUSE To pause a track, pressthe “ ” key.

REWIND/FASTFORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward atrack, hold the “ ” or“ ” key.

Compact Disc (CD) playeroperationIf the radio is already operating, it automati-cally turns off and the compact disc beginsto play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded,the system will turn on and the compactdisc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded and the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off andthe compact disc will start to play.


CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encodedwith text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is dis-played listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen whena CD is playing:

RandomTouch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-ing “Random” alternates between “Random Folder”, and “Random All”. This text will appear on thedisplay. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This textwill appear on the display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longerhighlighted

Browse

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in thelist to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list thefolders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose afolder.


SEEK (Reverse or FastForward) buttons

Press and hold the or seek but-tons for 1.5 seconds while the compact discis playing to reverse or fast forward thetrack being played. The compact disc playsat an increased speed while reversing orfast forwarding. When the button is re-leased, the compact disc returns to normalplay speed.

SEEK buttons

Press the seek button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressthe seek button several times to skipbackward several tracks.Press the seek button while a CD orMP3/WMA CD is playing to advance onetrack. Press the seek button severaltimes to skip forward several tracks. If thelast track on a CD is skipped, the first trackon the disc is played. If the last track in afolder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, thefirst track of the next folder is played.

AUX buttonThe AUX IN audio input port accepts anystandard analog audio input such as froma portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3player or a laptop computer. Press the AUXbutton to play a compatible deviceplugged into the AUX IN port.

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressedwith a compact disc loaded, the compactdisc will eject and the last source will beplayed.If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,the disc will reload.

Additional featuresFor additional information, refer to “iPod®player operation with Navigation System”in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB(Universal Serial Bus) connection port(models with Navigation System)” in thissection.

For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Naviga-tion System” in this section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)CONNECTION PORT (modelswithout Navigation System) (if soequipped)Connecting a device to the USBconnection port


LHA3516


CAUTION∙ To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-lowing precautions.

∙ Do not force the USB device into theUSB port. Inserting the USB devicetilted or up-side-down into the portmay damage the port. Make sure thatthe USB device is connected correctlyinto the USB port.



For additional information, refer to your de-vice manufacturer’s owner information re-garding the proper use and care of thedevice.

The USB port is located on the instrumentpanel. Insert the USB device into the con-nection port �1 .

When a compatible storage device isplugged into the connection port, compat-ible audio files on the storage device can beplayed through the vehicle’s audio system.

USB connections screenPress the MENU button and touch the“Connections” key or press the “Settings”key and touch the “Connections” key tochange USB settings.

∙ Auto Change SourceTouch ON or OFF to change the audiosource settings for USB memory de-vices or an iPod® connected through aUSB cable.

LHA4711


USB screen1. “USB Menu” key

Touch to switch to the USB Menuscreen.

2. Track informationTrack information such as the songname, artist name and album nameare displayed.


4. USB operation keysTouch to control USB playback func-tions

5. Play time and progress barThe play time of the track is displayed.The bar indicates the progress in play-ing a track.

USB operation keys

Touch to control USB playback functions.

Keys DescriptionEach time “ ” key istouched, the repeat modechanges.Touch to return to the be-ginning of the current track.Touch again to select theprevious track. Touch andhold to rewind the currenttrack.Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the nexttrack. Touch and hold tofast-forward the track.Each time “ ” key istouched, the random modechanges.

USB memory device playeroperationActivation and playingConnecting the USB memory device intothe port will start playing the USB memory.

USB memory device can also be played bytouching the “USB” key on the Menu screenor by touching USB on the Launch Bar.

To pause playing the USB memory devicetouch the “ ” key. To resume playing,touch the “ ” key.

Skipping tracksTo skip the tracks, push the orbuttons on the control panel or touch the“ ” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat-edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping tothe previous track may require pushingthe button or touching the key twice.Pushing the button or touching the keyonce may only restart the current trackfrom the beginning.

LHA4710


Fast-forwarding/rewindingTo rewind or fast-forward the track, pushand hold the or buttons on thecontrol panel or touch and hold the “ ”or “ ” keys on the screen.

Changing play modeRepeat mode

Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen tochange the repeat mode.The following modes are available:All: Repeat all

1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

1 Track: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the random mode as follows:No text displayed: Random off

All: Repeat all

1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

USB menuTouch the “USB Menu” key on the USBscreen to display the USB Menu screen.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USBscreen.

“Folder List” key Touch to display the folderlist. Touch an item on the listto select the folder. The sub-folder or track list will bedisplayed. Select a sub-folderor track from the list.

“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the al-bum artwork display on theUSB screen.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)CONNECTION PORT (models withNavigation System) (if soequipped)Connecting a device to the USBconnection port


LHA3516


CAUTION∙ To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-lowing precautions.

∙ Do not force the USB device into theUSB port. Inserting the USB devicetilted or up-side-down into the portmay damage the port. Make sure thatthe USB device is connected correctlyinto the USB port.




The USB port is located on the instrumentpanel. Insert the USB device into the con-nection port �1 .

When a compatible storage device isplugged into the connection port, compat-ible audio files on the storage device can beplayed through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operationAUX (auxiliary) button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition and press the AUX button toswitch to the USB input mode. If anotheraudio source is playing and a USB connec-tion port device is inserted, press the AUXbutton until the center display changes tothe USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while theUSB memory was playing, press the ON-OFF button to restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files beingplayed is shown on the display screen ofthe vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”to display the list of folders and files on theUSB device. Touch the name of a song onthe screen to begin playing that song.

SEEK buttons

Press the button while an audio fileon the USB device is playing to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressthe button several times to skipbackward several tracks.

LHA4006


Press the button while an audio fileon the USB device is playing to advanceone track. Press the button severaltimes to skip forward several tracks. If thelast track in a folder on the USB device isskipped, the first track of the next folder isplayed.

Random and repeat play modeWhile files on a USB device are playing, theplay pattern can be altered so that songsare repeated or played randomly.

RandomTouch the “Random” key to apply a randomplay pattern to the USB device. When theRandom mode is active, the text “Random”on the key will illuminate. By touching the“Random” key again, the text “RandomFolder” appears. By touching the “Random”key once more, the text “Random All” ap-pears. To cancel Random mode, touch the“Random” key until no text is illuminated.

RepeatTouch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeatplay pattern to the USB device. When theRepeat mode is active, the text on the “Re-peat” key will illuminate. By touching the“Repeat” key again, the text “Repeat Track”appears. By touching the “Repeat” key oncemore, the text “Repeat Folder” appears. Tocancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat”key until no text is illuminated.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATIONWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)Connecting iPod®

WARNINGDo not connect, disconnect or operatethe USB device while driving. Doing socan be a distraction. If distracted youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident or serious injury.

LHA3516







To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so thatthe iPod® can be controlled with the audiosystem controls and display screen, usethe USB port located on the instrumentpanel �1 . Connect the iPod®-specific end ofthe cable to the iPod® and the USB end ofthe cable to the USB port on the vehicle. Ifyour iPod® supports charging via a USBconnection, its battery will be charged

while connected to the vehicle with the ig-nition switch in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®can only be operated by the vehicle audiocontrols.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,remove the USB end of the cable from theUSB port on the vehicle, then remove thecable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

CompatibilityThe following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmwareversion 1.3.0 or later)



∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmwareversion 4.2.1 or later)*

∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmwareversion 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmwareversion 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmwareversion 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmwareversion 1.0.4 or later)


∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmwareversion 1.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 orlater)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 orlater)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not befully functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-dated to the version indicated above.


iPod screen1. “iPod Menu” key

Touch to switch to the iPod Menuscreen.



4. Album artworkAn image of the album artwork is dis-played when available if the setting isturned on.

5. iPod® operation keysTouch to control iPod® playback func-tions


iPod® operation keys

Touch to control iPod® playback functions.

Keys Description

Each time “ ” key istouched, the repeat modechanges.Touch to return to the be-ginning of the current track.Touch again to select theprevious track. Touch andhold to rewind the currenttrack.Touch to play the track.


Keys DescriptionTouch to select the nexttrack. Touch and hold tofast-forward the track.Each time “ ” key is

touched,the ran-dommodechanges.

iPod® memory device playeroperationActivation and playing

Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USBcable will activate the iPod® mode.

The iPod® can also be played by touchingthe “iPod” key on the Menu screen or bytouching iPod on the Launch Bar.

Skipping tracks

To skip the tracks, push the orbuttons on the control panel or touch the“ ” or “ ” keys on the screen repeat-edly until the preferred track is selected.

LHA4724


NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping tothe previous track may require pushingthe button or touching the key twice.Pushing the button or touching the keyonce may only restart the current trackfrom the beginning.

Fast-forwarding/rewindingTo rewind or fast-forward the track, pushand hold the or buttons on thecontrol panel or touch and hold the “ ”or “ ” keys on the screen,


Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screento change the repeat mode. The followingmodes are available.No text displayed: Repeat off

All: Repeat all

One: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the random mode as follows.No text displayed: Random off

Songs: Random play

iPod® MenuTouch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod®screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USBscreen.

“Folder List” key(if so equipped)

Touch to display the folderlist. Touch an item on the listto select the folder. The sub-folder or track list will bedisplayed. Select a sub-folderor track from the list.

“Album Artwork”key

Touch to run on/off the al-bum artwork display on theUSB screen.

“Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac-cording to the selected item.“Artists” key

“Albums” key“Songs” key“Podcasts” key“Genres” key“Composers” key“Audiobooks” key“iTunes Radio”key

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)Connecting iPod®

WARNINGDo not connect, disconnect or operatethe USB device while driving. Doing socan be a distraction. If distracted youcould lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident or serious injury.

LHA3516







To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so thatthe iPod® can be controlled with the audiosystem controls and display screen, usethe USB port located on the instrumentpanel �1 . Connect the iPod®-specific end ofthe cable to the iPod® and the USB end ofthe cable to the USB port on the vehicle. Ifyour iPod® supports charging via a USBconnection, its battery will be charged

while connected to the vehicle with the ig-nition switch in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®can only be operated by the vehicle audiocontrols.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,remove the USB end of the cable from theUSB port on the vehicle, then remove thecable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

CompatibilityThe following models are compatible:




∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmwareversion 4.2.1 or later)*

∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmwareversion 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmwareversion 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmwareversion 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmwareversion 1.1.3 or later)



∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmwareversion 1.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 orlater)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 orlater)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not befully functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-dated to the version indicated above.


iPod® main operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition. Press the AUX button repeatedlyto switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while theiPod® was playing, pressing the ON-OFFbutton will start the iPod®.

AUX button

When the AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the iPod® connected, thesystem will turn on. If another audio sourceis playing and the iPod® is connected, pressthe AUX button repeatedly until the centerdisplay changes to the iPod® mode.

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown onthe vehicle’s audio system display screen issimilar to the iPod® interface. Use thetouch-screen, BACK button or the scrollingknob to navigate the menus on the screen.

When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”key to bring up the iPod® interface.

LHA4007 LHA4592


Depending on the iPod® model, the followingitems may be available on the menu listscreen. For additional information abouteach item, refer to the iPod® Owner’s Manual.

∙ Playlists

∙ Artists

∙ Albums

∙ Genres

∙ Songs

∙ Composers

∙ Audiobooks

∙ Podcasts

Shuffle and repeat play mode

While the iPod® is playing, the play patterncan be altered so that songs are repeatedor played randomly.

ShuffleTouch the “Shuffle” key to apply a randomplay pattern to the iPod®. When the Shufflemode is active, the text is illuminated.Touching the “Shuffle” key once more willdisplay the “Shuffle songs” key. To cancelShuffle mode, touch the “Shuffle” key againuntil the text is no longer illuminated.

RepeatTouch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeatplay pattern to the iPod®. When the repeatmode is active, the text is illuminated.Touching the “Repeat” key once more willdisplay the “Repeat song” key. To cancel Re-peat mode, touch the “Repeat” key againuntil the text is no longer illuminated.

SEEK buttons

Press the or SEEK buttons toskip backward or forward one track.Press and hold the or SEEK but-tons for 1.5 seconds while a track is playingto reverse or fast forward the track beingplayed. The track plays at an increasedspeed while reversing or fast forwarding.When the button is released, the track re-turns to normal play speed.

Scrolling menusWhile navigating long lists of artists, al-bums or songs in the music menu, it ispossible to scroll the list by the first charac-ter in the name. To activate character in-dexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in theupper right corner of the screen. Turn theTUNE knob to choose the number or letterto jump to in the list and then press theAUDIO button.

If no character is selected after 2 seconds,the display returns to normal.

LHA2279


BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIOWITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audiodevice that is capable of playing audio files,the device can be connected to the vehi-cle’s audio system so that the audio files onthe device play through the vehicle’sspeakers.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-formed when the vehicle is stationary. Ifthe vehicle starts moving during the pro-cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the MENU button on thecontrol panel.

2. Touch the “Connections” key on thescreen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “AddNew” key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found amessage with a PIN appears on thescreen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept theconnection.

Menu Item ResultBluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

LHA4726


Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, thesystem will announce “transferring to theadd phone settings menu”. The system willstart the pairing procedure. When a com-patible phone is found, a message with aPIN appears on the screen. Operate theBluetooth® phone to complete the con-nection process. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connectionsscreen” in this section.

Bluetooth® screen1. “BT Menu” key

Depending on the Bluetooth® versionsupported by the connected device, ei-ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections”key is displayed.



4. Bluetooth® audio operation keysTouch to control Bluetooth® audioplayback functions


Bluetooth® operation keys

Touch to control Bluetooth® playbackfunctions.

Keys DescriptionEach time “ ” key is touched,the repeat mode changes.Touch to return to the beginning ofthe current track. Touch again toselect the previous track. Touch andhold to rewind the current track.Touch to play the track.


Touch to select the next track.Touch and hold to fast-forward thetrack.

Each time “ ” key is touched,the random mode changes.

LHA4727


Bluetooth® audio operationThe ability to pause, change tracks, fastforward, rewind, randomize and repeatmusic may be different between devices.Some or all of these functions may not besupported on each device.

NOTE:

Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de-vice that is connected, it may not be pos-sible to perform audio operations or adelay may occur before music is playedback.

Activation and playing

A Bluetooth® audio device can be played bytouching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menuscreen or by touching Bluetooth on theLaunch Bar.

To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ” keyto resume playing.

Changing foldersTo change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To fast-forward or rewind the track, pushand hold the or buttons on thecontrol panel or touch the “ ” or “ ”keys on the screen.


Touch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the repeat mode.Random mode

Touch the “ ” key on the screen tochange the random mode.

NOTE:

Available repeat/random modes changedepending on the connected device.

BT MenuTouch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth®audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au-dio menu screen.

The following items are available.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display theBluetooth® audio screen.

“Current List” key(if so equipped)*

A list of track in the cur-rently selected folder isdisplayed.

“Connections” key Touch to display theconnections screen.

“Folder List” key* Touch to display thefolder list. Touch an itemon the list to select thefolder.

*: displayed only when available.

NOTE:

Depending on the connected device, the“BT Menu” key may not be displayed.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIOWITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if soequipped)If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audiodevice that is capable of playing audio files,the device can be connected to the vehi-cle’s audio system so that the audio files onthe device play through the vehicle’sspeakers.


Connecting Bluetooth® audioTo connect your Bluetooth® audio deviceto the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button.


3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the com-mand and asks you to initiate connect-ing from the device. The connectingprocedure of the cellular phone variesaccording to each cellular phonemodel. For additional information, referto the cellular phone owner’s manual.

Audio main operationTo switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,press the AUX button repeatedly until theBluetooth® audio mode is displayed on thescreen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio aredisplayed on the screen.

LHA2773 LHA2844


CD CARE AND CLEANING∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend

the disc. Never touch the surface of thedisc.

∙ Always place the discs in the storagecase when they are not being used.

∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

∙ Do not use a conventional recordcleaner or alcohol intended for indus-trial use.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges by rubbing the inner and outeredges with the side of a pen or pencil asillustrated.

1. SOURCE switch2. Tuning switch3. Volume control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROLThe audio system can be operated usingthe controls on the steering wheel.

LHA0049 LHA2054


SOURCE switchPress the SOURCE switch to change themode in the following sequence:

AM →P1→ FM1 → FM2→ P2→ (SXM1 → SXM2→ SXM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped)) →CD* (if so equipped) → USB/iPod®* →Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM→P1.

* These modes are only available whencompatible media storage is inserted intothe device or connected to the system.

Volume control switchPush the + or – volume control switch toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

While the display is showing a map or audioscreen, tilt the Tuning switch upward ordownward to select a station, track, CD orfolder. For most audio sources, tilting theswitch up/down for more than 1.5 secondsprovides a different function than a tiltingup/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 secondsto seek up or down to the next station.

SXM (if so equipped)

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 secondsto go to the next or previous channel.

iPod®

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toincrease or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 secondsto fast forward or rewind the track be-ing played.

CD (if so equipped)


∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 secondsto increase or decrease the folder num-ber (if playing compressed audio files).

USB


∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 secondsto fast forward or rewind the track be-ing played.

Bluetooth® Audio

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds toskip ahead or back to the next song.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 secondsto reverse or fast forward the currentsong.

ANTENNAThe antenna cannot be shortened, but canbe removed. When you need to remove theantenna, turn the antenna rod counter-clockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antennaclockwise. Tighten the antenna rod tospecification using a suitable tool such asan open-end wrench. The antenna rodtightening specification is 3.4 – 3.6 N·m (30 –32 in-lb). Do not use pliers to tighten theantenna as they can leave marks on theantenna surface. The antenna rod cannotbe hand tightened to the proper specifica-tion.

CAUTIONAlways properly tighten the antennarod during installation or the antennarod may break during vehicle operation.


Roof antennaThe satellite radio antenna is located onthe roof of the vehicle on the passengerside.

This vehicle is equipped with SmartphoneIntegration technology. This allows manycompatible Smartphone applications tobe displayed and easily controlled throughthe vehicle’s touch-screen. This feature isan option on navigation system equippedvehicles. For additional information, referto the separate NissanConnect® Owner’sManual.

When installing a CB, ham radio or carphone in your vehicle, be sure to observethe following precautions; otherwise, thenew equipment may adversely affect theengine control system and other electronicparts.

WARNING∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibitthe use of cellular phones whiledriving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended.Exercise extreme caution at all timesso full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while talkingon the phone, pull off the road to asafe location and stop your vehicle.

NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (ifso equipped)

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


CAUTION∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic controlmodules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not routethe antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-waveratio as recommended by themanufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

WARNING∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have touse a phone while driving, exercise ex-treme caution at all times so full at-tention may be given to vehicleoperation.


CAUTIONTo avoid discharging the vehicle bat-tery, use a phone after starting theengine.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


Your NISSAN is equipped with theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Ifyou have a compatible Bluetooth® enabledcellular phone, you can set up the wirelessconnection between your cellular phoneand the in-vehicle phone module. WithBluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephonecall with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected tothe in-vehicle phone module, no otherphone connecting procedure is required.Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition with the previously connected cellu-lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to acceptconnections to other Bluetooth® de-vices. If your phone does not connect au-tomatically to the system, consult thephone’s owner’s manual for details ondevice operation.

You can connect up to five differentBluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you cantalk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-tween a compatible cellular phone andthe in-vehicle phone module before us-ing the hands-free phone system.

LHA4979


∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellularphones may not be recognized orwork properly. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and connecting in-structions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellularservice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal;such as in a tunnel, in an under-ground parking garage, near a tallbuilding or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is notideal or ambient sound is too loud, itmay be difficult to hear the other per-son’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in anarea surrounded by metal or far awayfrom the in-vehicle phone module toprevent tone quality degradation andwireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth® wireless connec-tion, the battery power of the cellularphone may discharge quicker than usual.The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem cannot charge cellular phones.

∙ For additional information, you can visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devicesmay cause interference or a buzzingnoise to come from the audio systemspeakers. Storing the device in a differ-ent location may reduce or eliminatethe noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to thecellular phone owner’s manual regard-ing the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATIONFCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use onlythe supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-tenna, modification, or attachmentscould damage the transmitter and mayviolate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause interferenceand

2. this device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meetsall requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regu-lations.

BLUETOOTH® is atrademark ownedby Bluetooth SIG,Inc. and licensedto Panasonic.


USING THE SYSTEMThe system allows hands-free operation ofthe Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commandsmay not be available so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-ized, which takes a few seconds. If thebutton is pressed before the initializationcompletes, the system will announce“There is no phone connected” and will notreact to voice commands.

Operating tipsTo get the best performance out of theNISSAN Voice Recognition System, observethe following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quietas possible. Keep all vents pointed awayfrom the microphone and close thewindows to eliminate surroundingnoises (traffic noises, vibration sounds,etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands cor-rectly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds beforespeaking a command. Otherwise, thecommand will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-ing between words.

∙ For calling contacts by name, pleasesay both the first and last name of thecontact for better recognition.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,press the button located on thesteering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.After the tone sounds, speak a command.The command given is picked up by themicrophone, and voice feedback is givenwhen the command is accepted.

∙ If a command is not recognized, thesystem announces, “Please say or se-lect a command from the displayed list.”Make sure the command is said exactlyas prompted by the system and repeatthe command in a clear voice.

∙ If you want to go back to the previouscommand, you can say “Go back” anytime the system is waiting for a response.

∙ You can cancel a command when thesystem is waiting for a response by say-ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Rec-ognition session. You can also pressand hold the button on the steer-ing wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time toend the Voice Recognition session.Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-sion is canceled, a double beep isplayed to indicate you have exited thesystem.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of thevoice feedback, push the (+ or -) volumecontrol switches on the steering wheelwhile being provided with feedback. Youcan also use the radio volume controlknob.

Voice Prompt InterruptIn most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel. After interrupting the system, waitfor a beep before speaking your command.


One Shot Call (if so equipped)To use the system faster, you may speakthe second level commands with the mainmenu command on the main menu. Forexample, press the button and afterthe tone say, “Call Redial”.

INDICATORSWhen a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth® wireless connec-tion, indicators �1 for the phone and textmessaging are displayed on the top of thescreen.

Indicator DescriptionIndicates there areunread receivedmessages.Indicates theBluetooth® devicethat is currentlyconnected.Indicates the strengthof the signal theBluetooth® device isreceiving.Indicates the amountof remainingBluetooth® devicebattery.

LHA4723


CONTROL BUTTONSThe control buttons for the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System are located onthe steering wheel.

VOICE COMMAND BUTTONPress and holdthe button for less than1.5 seconds to initiate theVoice Recognition session.To exit the Voice Recognitionsession press and holdthe for less than1.5 seconds. For additionalinformation, refer to “Voiceprompt interrupt” in thissection.

You can use the buttonto interrupt the system feed-back and give a command atonce.

PHONE BUTTONTo answer an incoming call orto end a call pressthe button.

To reject a call press and holdthe button.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:


LHA4495 LHA4726


To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the MENU button on thecontrol panel.

2. Touch the “Connections” key on thescreen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “AddNew” key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found amessage with a PIN appears on thescreen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept theconnection.

6. To access the Bluetooth® settingsmenu touch the “ ” key on the Con-nections screen. The following optionsare available:

Menu Item ResultBluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.


NOTE:

Some cellular phones may require you toaccept certain permissions in order toenable features on your Bluetooth® sys-tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro-cess, please check your cellular phone’sdisplay for a pop-up with the request togrant phonebook access.Granting phonebook access permissionwill allow your contacts to be down-loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys-tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu-lar phone stating that the Bluetooth®system would like to access your con-tacts and call history. Please select “Al-low” or Yes” to grant this permission.

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, thesystem will announce “transferring to theadd phone settings menu”. The system willstart the pairing procedure. When a com-patible phone is found, a message with aPIN appears on the screen. Operate theBluetooth® phone to complete the con-

nection process. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connectionsscreen” in this section.

VOICE COMMANDSVoice commands can be used to operatethe Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds to bring up the phonecommand menu. The commands avail-able are:

∙ Call <name>

∙ Dial <number>

∙ Recent Calls

∙ Read/Send Text (if so equipped)

∙ Voice Assistant (if so equipped)

∙ Phonebook

∙ Quick Dial

∙ Redial

∙ Select Phone

∙ Add Phone

∙ Call <name> Mobile

∙ Call <name> Home

∙ Call <name> Office

∙ Call <name> Main

∙ Call <name> Other

∙ Settings

“Call <name>”Speak this command to make a call to acontact that is stored in the phonebook.Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name toinitiate a call. If the system does not recog-nize the name it will display a list of similarnames. After the prompt, speak or touchan item number from the displayed list toplace the call.

“Dial <number>”Speak this command to make a call with aspoken phone number. After the prompt,say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phonenumber. The system will repeat the num-ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or“Correction” to re-enter the phone number.


“Recent Calls”The following commands are available un-der “Recent Calls”:

∙ Incoming CallsSpeak this command to list the last20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If thecall is from an entry in the phonebook,the name will be displayed. Otherwise,the phone number of the incoming callwill be displayed.When prompted, speak or touch theitem number on the screen to place thecall. Touch the “Next” key to movethrough the list of incoming calls.

∙ Outgoing CallsSpeak this command to list the last 20outgoing calls from the vehicle. If thecall was to an entry in the phonebook,the name will be displayed. Otherwise,the phone number of the outgoing callwill be displayed.When prompted, speak or touch theitem number on the screen to place thecall. Touch the “Next” key to movethrough the list of outgoing calls.

∙ Missed CallsSpeak this command to list the last 20missed calls to the vehicle. If the call isfrom an entry in the phonebook, thename will be displayed. Otherwise, thephone number of the missed call will bedisplayed.When prompted, speak or touch theitem number on the screen to place thecall. Touch the “Next” key to movethrough the list of missed calls.

“ReadText/SendText” (if so equipped)Speak this command to access text mes-saging functions. For additional information,refer to “Text messaging” in this section.

“Phonebook through voicecommand”Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quicksteps to access entries stored in thephonebook. Commands are organized bythe phone number type selected in the cel-lular device. For additional information, re-fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.

The following commands are available:

∙ <Say a Contact Name>

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Main

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Home

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Mobile

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Office

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Other

For additional information on manually se-lecting phonebook entries, refer to “Makinga call” in this section.

“Quick dial”Speak this command to access the Quickdial menu. After the prompt, speak or se-lect an item number on the displayed list toplace the call. For additional information,refer to “Making a call” in this section.

“Redial”Speak this command to call the last num-ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” todial the number of the last outgoing call.The system will display “Redialing<name/number>”. The name of thephonebook entry will be displayed if it isavailable, otherwise the number being re-dialed will be displayed.


“Select Phone”Speak this command to access the Con-nections menu. For additional information,refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” inthis section.

“Add Phone”Speak this command to access the Con-nections menu. For additional information,refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” inthis section.

“Settings”Speak this command to access the Sys-tem Voice settings menu. The system willexit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one ofthe following options on the screen tochange the settings.

∙ Beep Only for Opening PromptBy touching the “ON” key, the indicatorlight will illuminate, the system voice willturn off and only a tone will sound whenthe Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is activated. To turn the systemvoice back on, touch the “ON” key again,the indicator light will turn off.

∙ Best Match ListWhen the system doesn’t recognize aphonebook name or dial number, it willprovide a list of similar sounding results.To turn this off, touch the “ON” key, theindicator light will turn off. To turn on,touch the “ON” key again, the indicatorlight will turn on.

PHONE DISPLAY SCREENThe Phone screen can be displayed bypressing the button on the controlpanel.The following options are displayed:

∙ Quick DialDisplays the Quick Dial screen. For addi-tional information, refer to “Quick dial” inthis section.

∙ PhonebookDisplays the Phonebook screen. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Making acall” in this section.

LHA4705


∙ Call HistoryDisplays the Call History screen. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Making acall” in this section.

∙ Dial NumberDisplays the Dial Number screen. Foradditional information, refer to “Makinga call” in this section.

∙ Text MessageDisplays the received message screen.For additional information, refer to “Textmessaging” in this section.

∙ ConnectionsDisplays the Connections screen. Foradditional information, refer to“Bluetooth® connections screen” in thissection.

∙ VolumeDisplays the volume adjustmentscreen. For additional information, referto “Volume & beeps” in this section.

MAKING A CALLTo make a call press the button onthe control panel. Touch an option frommenu screen:

∙ PhonebookSelect a person and the phone numberyou wish to call from the phonebook.Depending on the device, the phone-book will be downloaded from the cel-lular phone automatically when it isconnected. If the automatic downloaddoes not take place, the phone numbermust be transferred to the hands-freephone system from the cellular phoneprior to using this method. For addi-tional information, refer to “Phone andtext message settings” in this section.

∙ Call HistorySelect a phonebook name or phonenumber from the recent incoming, out-going or missed calls tabs. Touch aphonebook name or phone numberlisted to initiate the call.

∙ Dial NumberEnter the phone number manually us-ing the keypad displayed on the screen.Touch the “OK” key on the screen to ini-tiate the call.

For additional options to make a call, referto “Voice commands” in this section.

Quick DialQuick Dial entries can be used to quicklymake a call. The system allows up to 20entries to be stored. To set up a quick dialpress the button on the controlpanel. Touch the “Quick Dial” key to display alist of quick dial entries. Touch the “Edit” keyto edit current entries or touch the “AddNew” key to make a new entry. Two meth-ods are given to create a quick dial entry:

∙ Touch the “Copy from Call History” keyto save a phone number from the In-coming, Outgoing or Missed call historylists. Select the person or phone num-ber from the menu to be added. A reg-istration menu will display the Entry #,phone number, phone number typestored in the cellular phone and VoiceTag. Touch the “OK” key.

∙ Touch the “Copy from Phonebook” key tosave a number from the phonebook. Usethe scroll keys on the side to move upand down through the menu. Select aperson to be added. A menu will displaythe Entry #, phone number, phone num-ber type stored in the cellular phone andVoice Tag. Touch the “OK” key.


Voice tagA voice tag can be recorded for each of theregistered Quick Dial numbers and can beused to dial the number by speaking it. Onthe Quick Dial registration screen, touchthe “Voice Tag” key. Select a relationshipfrom the list or create a new voice tag. Torecord a new voice tag touch the “Custom-ize” key on the screen then touch the “Store”key. Speak a name after the prompt, thenew tag will be stored. To edit or create anew voice tag touch the “Customize” keyagain. Touch the “Play” key to play the re-corded voice tag, touch the “Restore” key toedit the voice tag or “Delete” to delete thecurrent voice tag.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen a call is received by the phone con-nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, the call information isdisplayed on the control panel display.

Press the button on the steeringwheel or touch the “ Answer” key onthe screen to accept the call. To reject thecall touch the “ Decline” key on thescreen.

If the user is not able to answer the callright away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis-played on the screen. A message will beplayed for the caller: “I’m not able to take acall right now.” The user may then acceptthe call when available or reject the call.To reject a call, press and hold thebutton on the steering wheel.

“ ” (info) keyTouch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-play the information of the cellular phoneor to delete the device.Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paireddevice then select “Yes” when a messageappears.

DURING A CALLWhile a call is active the following optionswill appear on the control panel display:

∙ MuteTouch this key to mute or unmute thesystem.

∙ Dial NumberTouch this key to dial digits during thephone call.

∙ Use HandsetTouch this key to transfer the call to thehandset. To transfer the call back fromthe handset to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, press thebutton on the control panel then touchthe “Transfer Hands-free” key on thescreen.

∙ Switch CallThis option will only be available when asecond call is active.

If supported by the phone, theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemallows for call waiting functionality. If acall is received while another call is al-ready active, a message will be dis-played on the screen. Press thebutton on the steering wheel or touchthe “ Answer” key on screen to ac-cept the incoming call. Touch the“ Decline” key on the screen to re-ject the second call.


While a call is active, press the buttonon the steering wheel to access additionaloptions. Speak one of the following com-mands:

∙ “Send Digits”Speak this command followed by thedigits to enter digits during the phonecall.

∙ “Switch call”Speak this command to hold the sec-ond call and switch back to the originalcall.

ENDING A CALLTo end an active call, press the buttonon the steering wheel or touch the“ Hang up” key on the screen.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.Check local regulations before usingthis feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-strict the use of some of the applica-tions and features, such as social net-working and texting. Check localregulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature afterstopping your vehicle in a safe loca-tion. If you have to use the featurewhile driving, exercise extreme cau-tion at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while usingthe text messaging feature, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopyour vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled ifthe connected device does not supportthe Message Access Profile (MAP). Foradditional information, refer to thephone’s owner’s manual for details andinstructions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-mission to enable text messaging. Checkthe phone’s screen during Bluetooth®pairing. For some phones, you may needto enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’sBluetooth® menu for text messages toappear on the headunit. For additionalinformation, refer to your phone’sowner’s manual. Text message integra-tion requires that the phone supportMAP (Message Access Profile) for bothreceiving and sending text messages.Some phones may not support all textmessaging features. Please refer towww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-ibility information, as well as your de-vice’s owner’s manual.The system allows for the sending and re-ceiving of text messages through the ve-hicle interface.

The availability of the text message func-tion may vary depending on the cellularphone.


When the cellular phone connected to thevehicle receives a text message, a notifica-tion will appear on the control panel dis-play. To check the message, touch the“Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to savethe message to be checked later.

Access text messaging through the ve-hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone orthrough the vehicles control panel.

Text messaging using Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System (if soequipped)Sending a text message (if so equipped)

1. Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for less than 1.5 sec-onds.

2. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

3. The system will provide a list of avail-able commands in order to determinethe recipient of the text message.Choose from the following:

∙ Phonebook

∙ Quick Dial

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

∙ Missed Calls

∙ Dial

4. Once a recipient is chosen, the systemprompts for which message to send.Nine predefined messages are avail-able as well as three custom mes-sages. To choose one of the predefinedmessages, speak one of the followingafter the tone:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

∙ “Yes”

∙ “No”

∙ “Where are you?”

∙ “When?”

To send one of the custom messages,say “Custom Messages”. If more thanone custom message is stored, thesystem will prompt for the number ofthe desired custom message. For ad-ditional information on setting andmanaging custom text messages, re-fer to “Phone and text message set-tings” in this section.

Reading a received text message

1. Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for less than 1.5 sec-onds.

2. Say “Read Text” after the tone.The display will show a list of 20 messageswith the sender and delivery time. Touchthe “Next” key on the screen to view all mes-sages. To view a text message pressthe button on the steering wheel andspeak the number item list on the screen.The following options will be available:

∙ PlaySpeak this command to have the sys-tem say the message.

∙ ReplySpeak this command to send a textmessage response to the sender of thetext message.


∙ CallSpeak this command to call the sender.

∙ PreviousSpeak this command to move to theprevious text message (if available).

∙ NextSpeak this command to move to thenext text message (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed ifthe vehicle speed is less than 5 mph(8 km/h).

Text messaging using the controlpanelDisplay received message list


2. Touch the “Text Message” key on thescreen

3. Touch an item on the list to read orreply to the message.

Up to 100 messages can be stored in themessage list.

Received message screen

Touching the “Read” key on the incomingmessage notification screen or selecting amessage from the message list will showthe details of the received message on thedisplay.

Available actions:

∙ Prev.Touch this key to read the previousmessage.

∙ NextTouch this key to read the next mes-sage.

∙ Play/StopTouch the “Play” key to have the hands-free phone system read out the re-ceived message. Touch the “Stop” key tostop reading.

∙ CallIf the sender of the message is regis-tered in the phonebook, touch the “Call”key to make a call to the sender.

∙ ReplyA reply message can be selected fromthe predefined list or by a custom mes-sage.

Sending a text message (if so equipped)

This function may not be supported de-pending on the cellular phone.


2. Touch the “Text Message” key on thescreen.

3. Touch the “Create Message” key on thescreen.


The following items are available:Available item ActionTo Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.

Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list.Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook.Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history.

Select Text Fixed Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.Customized Touch to display a list of custom text messages. Custom text can be created or edited from the setting

menu. For additional information, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.Send Touch to send the message.


BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONSSCREEN1. “ ” (back) key2. Bluetooth tab3. Connections screen4. “Add New” key5. “ ” (settings) key6. “ ” (info) key7. “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connec-

tion) key8. “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System connection) key

Access the Connections screen to changesettings and view Bluetooth® information.To access the Connections screen pressthe MENU button on the controlpanel. Touch the “Connections” key on thescreen then select the Bluetooth tab.The paired phone will be added to the liston the Bluetooth® connections screen.

Touching the name of another device onthe list will switch the connected device.

“ ” (back) keyTouch the “ ” key to go back to theprevious screen.

Connecting Bluetooth®For additional information on connecting acellular phone or device to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Con-necting procedure” in this section.

NOTE:

Some cellular phones or other devicesmay cause interference or a buzzingnoise to come from the audio systemspeakers. Storing the device in a differ-ent location may reduce or eliminate thenoise.

Bluetooth tabThis tab will display up to six Bluetooth®devices. If six devices are already con-nected, one of the devices must be deletedbefore another device can be connected.

“Add New” keyTouch this key on the screen to connect anew Bluetooth® device. For additional in-formation, refer to “Connecting procedure”in this section.,

“ ” (Bluetooth® settings) keyTouch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-play a list of options.

∙ BluetoothTouch this key to turn the Bluetooth®connection on or off

∙ Favorite (Connection first)Touch this key to change which devicewill be connected first when multipledevices are connected to the vehicle.Turn the “ ” key on or off to make thedevice a favorite connection.Turn the “ ” key on or off to make thedevice a favorite connection.

LHA4716


∙ PinTouch this key to customize the PINcode. Input a four digit number thentouch the “OK” key. The new PIN will beset.

“ ” (info) keyTouch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-play the information of the cellular phoneor to delete the device.Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paireddevice then select “Yes” when a messageappears.

“ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System connection)key

A list of connected devices will be displayedon the screen. Touch the “ ” key next tothe name to connect a device to theHands-Free Phone System. If the phone islisted as a favorite, a star will appear on theicon. Touch the key again to disconnect thedevice. The device will not be removedfrom the list. For additional information onremoving a device, refer to “ (info) key”in this section.

“ ” (Bluetooth® Audioconnection) key

A list of connected devices will be displayedon the screen. Touch the “ ” key next tothe name to connect a device toBluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as afavorite, a star will appear on the icon.Touch the key again to disconnect the de-vice. The device will not be removed fromthe list. For additional information on re-moving a device, refer to “ (info) key” inthis section.

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGESETTINGSBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set-tings can be changed according to the us-er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set-tings menu press the MENU buttonon the control panel. Touch the “Settings”key then touch the “Phone” key.

LHA4721


The following options are available:Menu Item Result

Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section.Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.

Phonebook Download Entire Phone-book

All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicleare downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.

Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off.

Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off.Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages or cre-

ate a custom message.Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.

Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.


Volume & beepsThere are several methods to customizethe volume settings.

Volume & BeepsThe Volume & Beeps screen can be foundby pressing the MENU button on thecontrol panel, touching the “Settings” keyon the screen and selecting “Volume &Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow-ing options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on thescreen.The available settings are:

∙ RingtoneAdjust the volume level of the ringtoneof incoming calls.

∙ Outgoing CallAdjust the volume level of the outgoingcalls.

∙ Voice Prompt Vol.Adjust the volume level of the systemvoice.

∙ Text-to-speech Vol.Adjust the volume of the replay voice fortext messaging.

∙ Button BeepsTurns on/off the button beep soundsand alarm for prohibited operations.

Volume SettingsThe Volume settings screen can be foundby pressing the button on the controlpanel then touching the “Volume” key onthe screen. To adjust the volume of thefollowing options, touch the “–” and “+” keyson the screen.The available settings are:

∙ RingtoneAdjust the volume level of the ringtoneof incoming calls.

∙ Outgoing CallAdjust the volume level of the outgoingcalls.

WARNING∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have touse a phone while driving, exerciseextreme caution at all times so full at-tention may be given to vehicleoperation.


CAUTIONTo avoid discharging the vehicle bat-tery, use a phone after starting theengine.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)


Your NISSAN is equipped with theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Ifyou have a compatible Bluetooth® enabledcellular phone, you can set up the wirelessconnection between your cellular phoneand the in-vehicle phone module. WithBluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephonecall with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected tothe in-vehicle phone module, no otherphone connecting procedure is required.Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition with the connected cellular phoneturned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to five differentBluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you cantalk on only one cellular phone at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-ports the phone commands, so dialing aphone number using your voice is possible.For additional information, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition System” in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-tween a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using thehands-free phone system.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellularphones may not be recognized by thein-vehicle phone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and connecting in-structions.

LHA4497


∙ You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellularservice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive cellular signal;such as in a tunnel, in an under-ground parking garage, near a tallbuilding or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is notideal or ambient sound is too loud, itmay be difficult to hear the other per-son’s voice during a call.

∙ Immediately after the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position, it may be im-possible to receive a call for a short pe-riod of time.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in anarea surrounded by metal or far awayfrom the in-vehicle phone module toprevent tone quality degradation andwireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth® wireless con-nection, the battery power of the cellu-lar phone may discharge quicker thanusual. The Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System cannot charge cellularphones.

∙ For additional information, refer to“Troubleshooting guide” in this section ifthe hands-free phone system seems tobe malfunctioning.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devicesmay cause interference or a buzzingnoise to come from the audio systemspeakers. Storing the device in a differ-ent location may reduce or eliminatethe noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to thecellular phone owner’s manual regard-ing the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

∙ The signal strength display on themonitor will not coincide with the signalstrength display of some cellularphones.

REGULATORY INFORMATIONFCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use onlythe supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-tenna, modification, or attachmentscould damage the transmitter and mayviolate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause interferenceand

2. this device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meetsall requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regu-lations.


BLUETOOTH® is atrademark ownedby Bluetooth SIG,Inc. and licensedto Bosch.

VOICE COMMANDSYou can use voice commands to operatevarious Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem features using the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition system. For additional informa-tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice RecognitionSystem” in this section.

Voice Prompt InterruptWhile using the voice recognition system,the system voice can be interrupted to al-low the user to speak commands. Whilethe system is speaking, press thebutton on the steering wheel. The systemvoice will stop and a tone will be heard.After the tone, speak desired command(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call (if so equipped)To use the system faster, you may speakthe second level commands with the mainmenu command on the main menu. Forexample, press the button and afterthe tone say, “Call Redial”.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:


1. Press the [ ] button on the controlpanel.



4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

LHA2773


5. Initiate the connecting process fromthe handset. The system will displaythe message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayedon your Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN isdisplayed on your Bluetooth® device,select “Yes” to complete the pairingprocess.

For additional information, refer to theBluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOKTo access the vehicle phonebook:


2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the dis-played list.

4. The number of the entry will be dis-played on the screen. Touch the num-ber to initiate dialing.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touchthe “A-Z” key in the upper right corner ofthe screen. Turn the TUNE knob tochoose a letter or number and thenpress the AUDIO button. The list willmove to the first entry that begins withthat number or letter.

MAKING A CALLTo make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the controlpanel. The “Phone” screen will appearon the display.

2. Select one of the following options tomake a call:

∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from anentry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from theincoming, outgoing or missed.

∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call fromthe vehicle.

∙ “ ”: Input the phone number manu-ally using a keypad displayed on thescreen. For additional information, referto “How to use the touch-screen” in thissection.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen a call is placed to the connectedphone, the display will change to phonemode.

To accept the incoming call, either:

∙ Press the button on the steeringwheel, or

∙ Touch the icon on the screen.To reject the incoming call, either:

∙ Press the button on the steeringwheel, or

∙ Touch the phone icon on the screen.

DURING A CALLWhile a call is active, the following optionsare available on the screen:

∙ “Handset”Select this option to switch control ofthe phone call over to the handset.

∙ “Mute Mic.”Select this option to mute the micro-phone. Select again to unmute the mi-crophone.

∙ Phone iconSelect to end the phone call.


ENDING A CALLTo end a phone call, select the phoneicon on the screen or press the but-ton on the steering wheel.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”Check local regulations before usingthe feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-strict the use of some of the applica-tions and features, such as social net-working and texting. Check localregulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature afterstopping your vehicle in a safe loca-tion. If you have to use the featurewhile driving, exercise extreme cau-tion at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while usingthe text messaging feature, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopyour vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-mission to enable text messaging. Checkthe phone’s screen during Bluetooth®pairing. For some phones, you may needto enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’sBluetooth® menu for text messages toappear on the head unit. For additionalinformation, refer to the phone’s owner’smanual.Text message integration requires thatthe phone support MAP (Message Ac-cess Profile) for both receiving and send-ing text messages. Some phones maynot support all text messaging features.For additional information, please referto www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth orwww.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-ibility information. For additional infor-mation, refer to the phone’s Owner’sManual.The system allows for the sending and re-ceiving of text messages through the ve-hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of avail-able commands in order to determinethe recipient of the text message.Choose from the following:

∙ To (a name)

∙ Enter Number

∙ Missed Calls

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

For additional information, refer to“Voice commands” in this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the systemprompts for which message to send.Nine predefined messages are avail-able as well as three custom mes-sages. To choose one of the predefinedmessages, speak one of the followingafter the tone:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

∙ “Yes”

∙ “No”

∙ “Where are you?”

∙ “When?”

To send one of the custom messages,say “Custom Messages”. If more thanone custom message is stored, thesystem will prompt for the numberof the desired custom message. Foradditional information, refer to“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.The text message, sender and deliverytime are shown on the screen. Use the tun-ing switch to scroll through all textmessages if more than one are available.Press the button to exit the text mes-sage screen. Press the button to ac-cess the following options for replying tothe text message:

∙ Call BackSpeak this command to call the senderof the text message using theBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Send TextSpeak this command to send a textmessage response to the sender of thetext message.

∙ Read TextSpeak this command to read the textmessage again.

∙ Previous TextSpeak this command to move to theprevious text message (if available).

∙ Next TextSpeak this command to move to thenext text message (if available).

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed ifthe vehicle speed is less than 5 mph(8 km/h).


BLUETOOTH® SETTINGSTo access the phone settings:




Menu Item ResultPhone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.Bluetooth Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

LHA2844


PHONE SETTINGSTo access the phone settings:




4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and ad-just the following settings as desired:

∙ Sort Phonebook By:Select “First Name” or “Last Name” tochoose how phonebook entries arealphabetically displayed on the screen.

∙ Use Phonebook From:Select “Handset” to use the phone’sphonebook. Select “SIM” to use thephonebook on the SIM card. Select“Both” to use both sources.

∙ Download Phonebook Now:Select to download the phonebook tothe vehicle from the chosen source.

∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:Select to record a name for a phone-book entry for use with the NISSANVoice Recognition System.

∙ Text Messaging (if so equipped):Select to toggle the text message func-tionality on or off.

∙ Show Incoming Text (if so equipped):Select to toggle text notification on oroff.

∙ Auto Reply (if so equipped):Select to toggle auto reply functionalityon or off.

∙ Auto Reply Message (if so equipped):Select to choose a message that is sentwhen the auto reply function is acti-vated.

∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature (if so equipped):Select to toggle on or off the addition ofthe vehicle signature to outgoing mes-sages.

∙ Custom Text Messages (if so equipped):Select the predefined messages thatare used by the system.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to allvoice commands without difficulty. If prob-lems are encountered, try the following so-lutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number,try each solution in turn, starting with num-ber 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys-tem” in this section.2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level inthe vehicle.4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry fromthe phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additionalinformation, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.


The NISSAN Voice Recognition system al-lows hands-free operation of the systemsequipped on this vehicle, such as thephone and navigation systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,press the button located on thesteering wheel. When prompted, speak thecommand for the system you wish to acti-vate. The command given is picked up bythe microphone and performed when it isproperly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recog-nition will provide a voice response as wellas a message in the center display to in-form you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEMInitializationWhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When com-pleted, the system is ready to accept voicecommands. If the button is pressedbefore the initialization completes, the sys-tem will announce: “Voice Recognition Sys-tem not ready. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say acategory like phone or a command likepoints of interest followed by a brandname”. A list of available commands isthen spoken by the system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face iconon the display changes, speak a com-mand. Available commands are dis-cussed in this section.

4. Voice and display feedback are pro-vided when the command is accepted.

∙ If the command is not recognized, thesystem announces: “Command notrecognized”. Repeat the command in aclear voice.

∙ If you want to cancel the command orgo back to the previous menu of com-mands, press the button. The sys-tem will announce: “Canceling VoiceRecognition” or “Go back” depending onthe current menu level.

∙ Press the button to move backthrough the menus displayed on thescreen.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of thevoice feedback, use the volume controlswitches on the steering wheel or thevolume knob on the control panel.

∙ The voice command screen can also beaccessed using the control panel dis-play:


2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

LHA3511

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


Operating tipsTo get the best performance out of NISSANVoice Recognition, observe the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quietas possible. Close the windows to elimi-nate the surrounding noises (trafficnoises, vibration sounds, etc.), whichmay prevent the system from recogniz-ing the voice commands correctly.

∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speak-ing a command. Otherwise, the com-mand will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-ing between words.

SYSTEM FEATURESNISSAN Voice Recognition can activate thefollowing systems:

∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

∙ Navigation

∙ Audio

∙ Information

∙ My Apps (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to theseparate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbersNISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-tain way to speak numbers in voice com-mands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can beused for “0”.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to thefollowing example. For 1-800-662-6200, saydial number and then speak the phonenumber in any of the following formats:

∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”

∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”

∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six twooh oh”

For the best voice recognition phone dial-ing results, say phone numbers as singledigits. Also, full numbers can only be spo-ken for “800”. For example, you cannot say555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.

LHA3515


BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREEPHONE SYSTEM VOICECOMMANDSTo access the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System voice commands:


2. Say “Call” and then a name in the ve-hicle phonebook to call that entry. Oth-erwise, say “Phone” to access variousphone commands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off ”, thesystem announces: “Bluetooth® is off.Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”

If no phone is connected to the system andthe vehicle is stationary, the system an-nounces: “There is no phone connected.Would you like to connect a phone now?”Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All furtherBluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemvoice commands are only available if aphone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® isset to “On”, the following voice commandsare available:

∙ Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact inwhich you are trying to call. System willconfirm correct contact. Say “Dial” toinitiate dialing.

∙ Dial Number

Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.After the number is entered, say “Dial”to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” tocorrect the number entered. Say “GoBack” to return to the main menu.

∙ List Phonebook

Starting with the first alphabetical en-try in the vehicle phonebook, the sys-tem prompts for an additional com-mand. Say “Dial” to call the number ofthe phonebook entry. Say “Send Text”to send a text message to the numberof the phonebook entry. Say “Next En-try” to skip to the next alphabetical en-try in the vehicle phonebook, wherethe same options will then be available.

∙ Recent Calls

The system prompts for an additionalcommand. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incom-ing Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to displaya list of such calls on the screen.

Speak the number of the entry dis-played on the screen to dial that num-ber or say “Next Page” to view entrieson the next page (if available).

∙ Redial

Redials the last called number.

∙ Read Text (if so equipped)

Reads an incoming text message.

∙ Send Text (if so equipped)

Sends a text message.

∙ Select Phone

The system replies “Please use manualcontrols to continue”. Use manual con-trols to change the active phone fromamong the listed phones connectedto the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwith Navigation System” in this section.


NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECOMMANDSThe following voice commands are avail-able for the navigation system:

∙ Street Address (address)

∙ Points of Interest (name)

∙ POI by Category

∙ Home

∙ Address Book

∙ Previous Destinations

∙ Enter Address in Steps

∙ Cancel Route


AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDSTo access the audio system voice commands:


2. Say “Audio”

3. Speak a command from the followingavailable commands:

∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.)Allows user to select radio band

∙ Tune AM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desiredAM frequency

∙ Tune FM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desiredFM frequency

∙ SXM Channel (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desiredSXM station (if so equipped)

∙ CD Track (number)

Allows user to select track to be played

∙ Play Song (name)

Allows user to select song name to beplayed

∙ Play Artist (name)

Allows user to select artist to be played

∙ Play Album (name)

Allows user to select album name tobe played

For additional information, refer to “Audiosystem” in this section.

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDSThe following voice commands are avail-able for the information functions of thenavigation system:

∙ Traffic

∙ Fuel Prices

∙ Stocks

∙ Movie Listings

∙ Current Weather

∙ Weather Map

∙ 5 — day Forecast

∙ 6 — hour Forecast


MY APPS VOICE COMMANDSMany Apps can be accessed using thisvoice command. For additional informa-tion, refer to the separate NissanConnect®Owner’s Manual.


HELP VOICE COMMANDSThe following voice commands can bespoken to have the system provide in-structions and tips for using the NISSANVoice Recognition System.

∙ List Commands

∙ What Can I Say?

∙ General Help

∙ Quit

∙ Exit

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to allvoice commands without difficulty. If prob-lems are encountered, follow the solutionsgiven in this guide for the appropriate error.Where the solutions are listed by number,try each solution in turn, starting with num-ber one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message SolutionThe system responds “CommandNot Recognized” or the system failsto recognize the commandcorrectly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.


MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Driving precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Ignition switch positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Engine protection mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Automatic transmission (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system. . . . . . . . . 5-26Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-29Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . 5-30Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-33

WARNING∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from slidingor shifting. Do not place cargo higherthan the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-gerous. It can cause unconsciousnessor death.

∙ Always keep the doors closed whendriving the vehicle. Do not drive withthe doors open and do not attempt totransport long cargo by driving withthe doors open. Doing so can damagethe doors and door hinges. Cargo mayalso fall out of the vehicle which maycause serious personal injury ordeath.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with allwindows fully open, and have the ve-hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-gine running for any extended lengthof time.

∙ Keep the doors closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with this open,follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the body, followthe manufacturer’s recommendationto prevent carbon monoxide entryinto the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body shouldbe inspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumesare entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system,underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYSTThe three-way catalyst is an emission con-trol device installed in the exhaust system.Exhaust gases in the three-way catalystare burned at high temperatures to helpreduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

WARNING∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s abilityto help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions are de-tected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warmingit up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

DRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other types ofvehicles.

They have larger tires and higher groundclearance than passenger cars to makethem capable of performing in a variety ofapplications. This gives them a higher cen-ter of gravity than ordinary cars. An advan-tage of higher ground clearance is a betterview of the road, allowing you to anticipateproblems. However, they are not designedfor cornering at the same speeds as con-ventional 2-Wheel Drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed toperform satisfactorily under off-road con-ditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turnsat high speeds. As with other vehicles ofthis type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly may result in loss of control or vehicle

rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

A loaded vehicle with a higher center ofgravity may handle differently than an un-loaded vehicle. The risk of loss of control orvehicle rollover increases as more cargo isloaded in the vehicle. The risk increasesbecause the cargo placed in the vehicleraises the vehicle’s center of gravity. As aresult, the van handles differently fromother ordinary passenger vehicles and ithas less resistance to rollover which canmake it more difficult to control in an emer-gency situation. Placing any load on theroof also raises the center of gravity andincreases the potential for rollover. Do notoverload your vehicle and make sure theload is evenly distributed.

To reduce the risk of loss of control or ve-hicle rollover drive at slower speed, avoidabrupt steering changes and increaseyour following distance and allow for in-creased stopping distance.

Be sure to read the driving safety precau-tions in this section.

Starting and driving 5-3

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as pos-sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, and it isthe driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-rect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumi-nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately1 minute and then remain continuously illu-minated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunc-tion indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, includ-ing the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioning prop-erly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSdoes not monitor the tire pressure ofthe spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system maynot detect a sudden drop in tire pres-sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light doesnot automatically turn off when the tirepressure is adjusted. After all your tiresare inflated to the recommended pres-sure, the vehicle must be driven atspeeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to acti-vate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

∙ The TIRE PRES warning appears in thetrip computer when the low tire pres-sure warning light is illuminated andlow tire pressure is detected. The TIREPRES warning turns off when the lowtire pressure warning light turns off.


∙ The TIRE PRES warning does not appearif the low tire pressure warning light illu-minates to indicate a TPMS malfunc-tion. Instead, TPMS ERROR will appear inthe trip computer.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls dependingon the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-eration and the outside temperature.Do not reduce the tire pressure afterdriving because the tire pressure risesafter driving. Low outside temperaturecan lower the temperature of the airinside the tire which can cause a lowertire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light toilluminate. If the warning light illumi-nates, check the tire pressure for all fourtires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information labelis located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tirepressure warning light” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section and “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.



∙ If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-ing with under-inflated tires may per-manently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury.Check the tire pressure for all fourtires. Adjust the tire pressure to therecommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light off. If you have a flattire, replace it with a spare tire as soonas possible. (For additional informa-tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, when aspare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute.Have your tires replaced and/or TPMSsystem reset as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

CAUTIONDo not place metalized film or anymetal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-dows. This may cause poor reception ofthe signals from the tire pressure sen-sors, and the TPMS will not functionproperly.


Some devices and transmitters may tem-porarily interfere with the operation of theTPMS and cause the low tire pressurewarning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using similarradio frequencies are near the vehicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) ora DC/AC converter is being used in ornear the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light mayilluminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheeland tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and theID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified byNISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


For Canada:

This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNINGFailure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in lossof control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or suddensteering maneuvers, because these drivingpractices could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control couldresult in a collision with other vehicles orobjects or cause the vehicle to roll over,particularly if the loss of control causesthe vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid drivingwhen tired. Never drive when under the in-fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs whichmay cause drowsiness). Always wear yourseat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual, and also in-struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,an unbelted or improperly belted personis significantly more likely to be injuredor killed than a person properly wearinga seat belt.


OFF-ROAD RECOVERYWhile driving, the right side or left sidewheels may unintentionally leave the roadsurface. If this occurs, maintain control ofthe vehicle by following the procedure be-low. Please note that this procedure is onlya general guide. The vehicle must be drivenas appropriate based on the conditions ofthe vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release theaccelerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer thevehicle to follow the road while vehiclespeed is reduced. Do not attempt todrive the vehicle back onto the roadsurface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turnthe steering wheel until both tires re-turn to the road surface. When all tiresare on the road surface, steer the ve-hicle to stay in the appropriate drivinglane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-turn the vehicle to the road surfacebased on vehicle, road or traffic con-ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to astop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSRapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” canoccur if the tire is punctured or is damageddue to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid airpressure loss can also be caused by drivingon under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-dling and stability of the vehicle, especiallyat highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss bymaintaining the correct air pressure andvisually inspecting the tires for wear anddamage. For additional information, referto “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly losesair pressure or “blows-out” while driving,maintain control of the vehicle by followingthe procedure below. Please note that thisprocedure is only a general guide. The ve-hicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road andtraffic.

WARNINGThe following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pres-sure. Losing control of the vehicle maycause a collision and result in personalinjury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pullsin the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the acceleratorpedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.


1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release theaccelerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safelocation off the road and away fromtraffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashersand contact a roadside emergencyservice to change the tire. For addi-tional information, refer to “Changing aflat tire” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNINGNever drive under the influence of alco-hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstreamreduces coordination, delays reactiontime and impairs judgement. Drivingafter drinking alcohol increases thelikelihood of being involved in an acci-dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-tionally, if you are injured in an accident,alcohol can increase the severity of theinjury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-ever, you must choose not to drive under theinfluence of alcohol. Every year thousands ofpeople are injured or killed in alcohol-relatedcollisions. Although the local laws vary onwhat is considered to be legally intoxicated,the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-ferently and most people underestimate theeffects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’tdrive if your ability to operate your vehicle isimpaired by alcohol, drugs, or some otherphysical condition.

WARNING∙ Never remove the ignition key or place

the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver tolose control of the vehicle and couldresult in serious vehicle damage orpersonal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe ignition lock is designed so the ignitionswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK posi-tion and the key cannot be removed untilthe shift lever is moved to the P (Park) po-sition.

When removing the key from the ignitionswitch, make sure the shift lever is in the P(Park) position.

If the shift lever is not returned to the P(Park) position, the ignition switch cannotbe placed in the LOCK position.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-tion with the ignition switch in the ONposition.

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.


If the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)position after the ignition switch is placedin the OFF position or when the ignitionswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK posi-tion, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-tion.

2. Place the ignition switch slightly to-ward the ON position.


4. Remove the key.

The shift lever is designed so it cannotmove out of P (Park) and into any of theother gear positions if the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position or if the key isremoved from the switch.

The shift lever can be moved if the igni-tion switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ON positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the ignitionswitch. For models without NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System, when the igni-tion switch is in the OFF position, thesteering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked,it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock-wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the igni-tion to the LOCK position. Remove thekey. To unlock the steering wheel, insertthe key and turn it gently while rotatingthe steering wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCKposition, turn the steering wheel to theleft or right while turning the key to un-lock the key cylinder.

WSD0041


IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (1)

The engine can be turned off without lock-ing the steering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio when the engine isnot running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition systemand the electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon asthe engine has started, release the key. Itautomatically returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM (if so equipped)The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) separate from the regis-tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible,or at least whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights areclean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-ance and condition. Also check tires forproper inflation.

∙ Check that all doors are closed.

∙ Position seat and adjust headrestraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lightswhen the ignition switch is placed in theON position. For additional information,refer to “Warning lights, indicator lightsand audible reminders” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of thismanual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE


1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switchis turned to the OFF position or if thekey is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to oper-ate if the shift lever is in any of thedriving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot offthe accelerator pedal by placing theignition switch in the START position.Release the key when the enginestarts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start inextremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the acceleratorpedal a little (approximately 1/3 to thefloor) and hold it and then crank theengine. Release the key and the ac-celerator pedal when the enginestarts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-cause it is flooded, depress the accel-erator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it. Crank the engine for5–6 seconds. After cranking the en-gine, release the accelerator pedal.Crank the engine with your foot offthe accelerator pedal by turning theignition key to the START position. Re-lease the key when the engine starts.If the engine starts, but fails to run,repeat the above procedure.

CAUTIONDo not operate the starter for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start, turn the key to the OFFposition and wait 10 seconds beforecranking again, otherwise the startercould be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least30 seconds after starting. Do not racethe engine while warming it up. Drive ata moderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine run-ning for a minimum of 2–3 minutesbefore shutting it off. Starting andstopping the engine over a short pe-riod of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situationsthat can lead to potential battery dis-charge and potential no-start conditionssuch as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularlyand/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.

STARTING THE ENGINE


ENGINE PROTECTION MODEThe engine has an engine protection modeto reduce the chance of damage if thecoolant temperature becomes too high(for example, when climbing steep gradesin high temperature with heavy loads, suchas when towing a trailer). When the enginetemperature reaches a certain level:

∙ The engine coolant temperature gaugewill move toward the H position.

∙ Engine power may be reduced.

∙ The air conditioning cooling functionmay be automatically turned off for ashort time (the blower will continue tooperate).

Engine power and, under some conditions,vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speedcan be controlled with the acceleratorpedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate atthe desired speed. The transmission willdownshift or upshift as it reaches pre-scribed shift points. You can also shiftmanually.

As driving conditions change and enginecoolant temperature is reduced, vehiclespeed can be increased using the accel-

erator pedal, and air conditioning coolingfunction will automatically be turned backon.

A malfunction may have occurred if:

∙ The engine coolant temperature is notreduced,

∙ The air conditioning cooling functiondoes not turn back on, or

∙ The engine oil pressure warning lightilluminates or the engine coolant tem-perature gauge indicates an overheat-ing condition.

If a malfunction occurs move the vehicleoff the road in a safe area and allow theengine to cool. If the condition is still pres-ent after checking the oil and coolant, donot continue to drive. It is recommendedthat you contact a NISSAN dealer.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) mayalso come on. If only it remains on, you donot need to have your vehicle towed, buthave it inspected soon. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice. For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “In-struments and controls” section of thismanual.

WARNINGOverheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase the chanceof a collision. Be especially careful whendriving. If the vehicle cannot maintain asafe driving speed, pull to the side of theroad in a safe area. Allow the engine tocool and return to normal operation. Foradditional information, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

CAUTIONRunning the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)

WARNING∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shiftingis completed. Failure to do so couldcause you to lose control and have anaccident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forwardor reverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-versing. This could cause an accidentor damage the transmission.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shiftto the N (Neutral) position while driv-ing. Coasting with the transmission inthe N (Neutral) position may cause se-rious damage to the transmission.

CAUTION∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal. Thefoot brake should be used for thispurpose.

The A/T in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power andsmooth operation.

The recommended operating proceduresfor this transmission are shown on the fol-lowing pages. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance and driv-ing enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving theshift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand move the shift lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then graduallystart the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designedso the foot brake pedal MUST be de-pressed before shifting from P (Park) toany drive position while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignitionswitch is placed in the LOCK or OFF posi-tion.


To move the shift lever:

: Shift while depressing the brakepedal

: Shift without depressing the brakepedal

ShiftingAfter starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and move the shift lever out ofthe P (Park) position.

WARNINGApply the parking brake if the shift leveris in any position while the engine is notrunning. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal in-jury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF orACC position for any reason while the ve-hicle is in N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) posi-tion, the ignition switch cannot be turnedto the LOCK position. Move the shift lever tothe P (Park) position, then the ignitionswitch can be turned to the LOCK position.

P (Park)

CAUTIONTo prevent transmission damage, usethe P (Park) position only when the ve-hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position whenthe vehicle is parked or when starting theengine. Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped.

The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift lever from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on ahill, apply the parking brake first, then movethe shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTIONTo prevent transmission damage, usethe R (Reverse) position only when thevehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before selecting the R (Reverse)position. The brake pedal must be de-pressed to move the shift lever from P(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position toR (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to N (Neutral) andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicle ismoving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

LIC2709


Manual shift modeWhen the manual shift mode button �A ispressed while driving, the transmission en-ters the manual shift mode. Shift rangescan be selected manually.

To leave manual mode from any positionpress the manual shift mode button �Aagain. Manual shift mode is also canceledwhen the vehicle is restarted.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range isdisplayed on the position indicator in themeter. After pressing the manual shiftmode button, the position indicator firstdisplays M4 (Fourth) (5–speed automatic

transmission) or M1 (First) through M6(Sixth), depending on the current gear po-sition as indicated in the following table(7–speed automatic transmission):

Current gearposition:

Position indicatorfirst displays:

First M1Second M2Third M3Fourth M4Fifth M5Sixth M6Seventh M7

Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:

M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4←→M5←→M6*←→M7*

*If so equipped

M7 (Seventh) (if so equipped)

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6←→ M7

M7 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.

M6 (Sixth) (if so equipped)

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

M6 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter

M5 (Fifth)

Allows the vehicle to shift to the highestgear (5–speed automatic transmission).


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4←→ M5


M4 (Fourth)

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4


LSD2004


M3 (Third)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3


M2 (Second)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.


M1 ←→ M2


M1 (First)

Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-ing on steep downhill grades.

M1 will be displayed on the position indica-tor on the meter.

∙ Remember not to drive at high speedsfor extended periods of time in lowerthan M4 range. This reduces fueleconomy.

When shifting up

Push the shift switch to the + (up) side.(Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down

Push the shift switch to the � (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

∙ The transmission will automaticallydownshift the gears. (For example, if youselect the 3rd range, the transmissionwill shift down between the 3rd and 1stgears.)

∙ Pushing the shift switch rapidly will shiftthe ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode

Press and hold the +(UP) button to returnthe transmission to the normal drivingmode.

∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission may not shift to the selectedgear immediately because of vehiclespeed. The transmission will upshiftor downshift when vehicle speedmatches the programmed transmis-sion shift points. This helps maintaindriving performance and reduces thechance of vehicle damage or loss ofcontrol.

∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission will not upshift to a highergear than is manually selected. Whenthe vehicle speed decreases, thetransmission automatically shiftsdown and shifts to 1st gear before thevehicle comes to a stop.


Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the shift levermay not be moved from the P (Park) posi-tion even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, release the shiftlock. The shift lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, for models without theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System, thesteering wheel will be locked unless theignition switch is turned to the ON position.This allows the vehicle to be moved if thebattery is discharged.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P(Park), have the automatic transmissionsystem checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

WARNINGIf the shift lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is de-pressed, the stop lights may not work.Malfunctioning stop lights could causean accident injuring yourself andothers.

Accelerator downshift— in D (Drive) position —For passing or hill climbing, depress theaccelerator pedal to the floor. This shiftsthe transmission down into a lower gear,depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, pleasenote that the transmission will be locked inany of the forward gears according to thecondition.

If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheelspinning and subsequent hard braking,the fail-safe system may be activated.This will occur even if all electrical cir-cuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and wait for 3 seconds. Thenplace the ignition switch back in the ONposition. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does notreturn to its normal operating condition,have the transmission checked and re-paired, if necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

LSD0101


WARNING∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fullyengaged.


To engage: Firmly depress the parkingbrake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-sition.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedaland it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-ing light goes out.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-tions, it cancels automatically. The SETindicator light illuminates in the tripcomputer then blinks to warn the driver.For additional information, refer to “SETindicator light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

LSD0158 LSD3544

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL


∙ If the SET indicator light blinks, push theON/OFF switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ The SET indicator light may blink whenthe ON/OFF switch is pushed on whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set thecruise control system, use the followingprocedures.

WARNINGDo not use the cruise control when driv-ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that variesin speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-out keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON/OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicatorlight in the trip computer will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. The SETindicator light in the trip computer will illu-minate. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

∙ To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steephills. If this happens, drive without thecruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indi-cator light in the trip computer goesout.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicatorlight goes out.

∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator light and SET indicatorlight in the trip computer go out.

The cruise control is automatically can-celed and the SET indicator light in the tripcomputer goes out if:

∙ You depress the brake pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SETswitch. The preset speed is deletedfrom memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the COAST/SETswitch.


∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RESswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed increases by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, pushthe COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST/SETswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed decreases by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push andrelease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehiclereturns to the last set cruising speed whenthe vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTIONDuring the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to ob-tain maximum engine performanceand ensure the future reliability andeconomy of your new vehicle. Failure tofollow these recommendations may re-sult in shortened engine life and re-duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-stant speed, either fast or slow, and donot run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-sible.

∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle orother parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel EfficientDriving Tips to help you achieve the mostfuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and BrakePedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator andbrake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-muting and coast whenever pos-sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate andminimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with trafficlights allows you to reduce your num-ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-mize red light stops and improve fuelefficiency.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS


3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at HigherVehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is moreefficient to open windows to cool thevehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is moreefficient to use A/C to cool the vehicledue to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabinwhen the A/C is on reduces coolingload.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and notexceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (wherelegally allowed) can improve fuel effi-ciency due to reduced aerodynamicdrag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distancebehind other vehicles reduces un-necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipatechanges in speed permits reducedbraking and smooth accelerationchanges.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to roadconditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highwaydriving helps maintain a steadyspeed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effectivein providing fuel savings when drivingon flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system todetermine the best route to savetime.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safefor stops exceeding 30–60 secondssaves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for TollRoads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers touse special lanes to maintain cruis-ing speed through the toll and avoidstopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impactto fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than30 seconds of idling at start-up toeffectively circulate the engine oil be-fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-ating temperature more quicklywhile driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parkingarea or in the shade whenever pos-sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, openingthe windows will help to reduce theinside temperature faster, resulting inreduced demand on your A/C sys-tem.


∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduledmaintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correctpressure. Low tire pressure increasestire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the front wheels in correct align-ment. Improper alignment increasestire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engineoil. For additional information, refer to“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tions” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls ormake the vehicle move. Unattendedchildren could become involved in se-rious accidents.

WSD0050

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels asillustrated.

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB �A :

Turn the wheels into the curb andmove the vehicle forward until the curbside wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB �B :

Turn the wheels away from the curband move the vehicle back until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB �C :

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move awayfrom the center of the road if it moves.


The power assisted steering uses a hy-draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-sist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,you will still have control of the vehicle.However, much greater steering effort isneeded, especially in sharp turns and atlow speeds.

WARNINGIf the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

POWER STEERING


The brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONSUsing the brakesAvoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will overheat the brakes,wear out the brake pads faster, and reducegas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to preventthe brakes from overheating, reduce speedand downshift to a lower gear before goingdown a slope or long grade. Overheatedbrakes may reduce braking performanceand could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-celerating could cause the wheels toskid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the power as-sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-ing will be harder.

Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet. Asa result, your braking distance will be lon-ger and the vehicle may pull to one sideduring braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brakepedal to heat up the brakes. Do this untilthe brakes return to normal. Avoid drivingthe vehicle at high speeds until the brakesfunction correctly.

Parking brake break-inBreak in the parking brake shoes wheneverthe stopping effect of the parking brake isweakened or whenever the parking brakeshoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,in order to assure the best braking perfor-mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicleservice manual. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can help maintain ve-hicle control during braking on slip-pery surfaces. Remember that stop-ping distances on slippery surfaceswill be longer than on normal sur-faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintaina safe distance from the vehicle infront of you. Ultimately, the driver isresponsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

BRAKE SYSTEM


– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size andtype as specified on the Tire andLoading Information label. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Tireand Loading Information label” inthe “Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheelsdo not lock during hard braking or whenbraking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheeland varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding.By preventing each wheel from locking, thesystem helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swervingand spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.Depress the brake pedal with firm steadypressure, but do not pump the brakes. TheAnti-lock Braking System will operate toprevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNINGDo not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test featureThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you startthe engine and move the vehicle at a lowspeed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noiseand/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.This is normal and does not indicate a mal-function. If the computer senses a mal-function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-nates the ABS warning light on theinstrument panel. The brake system thenoperates normally, but without anti-lockassistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates duringthe self-test or while driving, have the ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operationThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 -10 km/h). The speed varies according toroad conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actuatorrapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-sure. This action is similar to pumping thebrakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-tion in the brake pedal and hear a noisefrom under the hood or feel a vibrationfrom the actuator when it is operating. Thisis normal and indicates that the ABS is op-erating properly. However, the pulsationmay indicate that road conditions are haz-ardous and extra care is required whiledriving.

BRAKE ASSISTWhen the force applied to the brake pedalexceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist isactivated generating greater braking forcethan a conventional brake booster evenwith light pedal force.


WARNINGThe Brake Assist is only an aid to assistbraking operation and is not a collisionwarning or avoidance device. It is thedriver’s responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely and be in control of the vehicle atall times.

∙ ABLS system uses automatic braking totransfer power from a slipping drivewheel to the wheel on the same axlewith more traction. The ABLS systemapplies braking to the slipping wheel,which helps redirect power to the otherwheel.

∙ The ABLS system is always on. In someconditions, the system may automati-cally turn the ABLS system off. If the sys-tem is automatically turned off, normalbrake function will continue. ABLS willfunction even when the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system is turned off.

∙ The ABLS does not operate if bothwheels on a drive axle are slipping.

WARNING∙ The ABLS system helps provide in-

creased traction, but will not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering op-eration or by careless driving or dan-gerous driving practices. Reduce ve-hicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slip-pery surfaces. Always drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN approved for your vehicleor are extremely deteriorated, theABLS system may not operate prop-erly. This could adversely affect ve-hicle handling performance, and theslip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the ABLS sys-tem may not operate properly and theslip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones are used,the ABLS system may not operateproperly and the slip indicator lightmay illuminate.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)SYSTEM


The VDC system uses various sensors tomonitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.Under certain driving conditions, the VDCsystem helps to perform the followingfunctions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reducewheel slip on one slipping drive wheelso power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engineoutput to reduce drive wheel slip basedon vehicle speed (traction control func-tion).

∙ Controls brake pressure at individualwheels and engine output to help thedriver maintain control of the vehicle inthe following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-low the steered path despite in-creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin dueto certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver tomaintain control of the vehicle, but it can-not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, theindicator light in the instrument panelflashes to note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the systemmay determine some action is requiredto help keep the vehicle on the steeredpath.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise or vibration fromunder the hood. This is normal and indi-cates that the VDC system is workingproperly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to theroad conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,the indicator light comes on in theinstrument panel. The VDC system auto-matically turns off when the indicator lightis on.The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off theVDC system. The indicator light illu-minates to indicate the VDC system is off.When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn offthe system, the VDC system still operates

to prevent one drive wheel from slipping bytransferring power to a non-slipping drivewheel. The indicator light flashes ifthis occurs. All other VDC functions are offand the indicator light will not flash.The VDC system is automatically reset toON when the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-ture that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle for-ward or in reverse at a slow speed. Whenthe self-test occurs, you may hear a clunknoise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and is not an indica-tion of a malfunction.

WARNING∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speed andbe especially careful when driving andcornering on slippery surfaces and al-ways drive carefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deteriorated,the VDC system may not operateproperly. This could adversely affectvehicle handling performance, andthe indicator light may flash orthe indicator light mayilluminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly and boththe and indicator lightsmay illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, both theand the indicator lights mayilluminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate. Do not drive on thesetypes of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones are used,the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTIONDuring braking while driving through turns,the system optimizes the distribution offorce to each of the four wheels dependingon the radius of the turn.

WARNING∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speed andbe especially careful when driving andcornering on slippery surfaces and al-ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deteriorated,the VDC system may not operateproperly. This could adversely affectvehicle handling performance, andthe indicator light may flash orthe indicator light mayilluminate.


∙ If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly and boththe and indicator lightsmay illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, both theand the indicator lights mayilluminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate. Do not drive on thesetypes of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones are used,the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

WARNING∙ Always turn and look back before

backing up. The RSS is not a substi-tute for proper backing procedures.

∙ Read and understand the limitationsof the RSS as contained in this section.Inclement weather may affect thefunction of the RSS; this may includereduced performance or a falseactivation.

∙ This system is not designed to pre-vent contact with small or movingobjects.

LSD0088

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if soequipped)


∙ The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in detecting large station-ary objects to help avoid damagingthe vehicle. The system will not detectsmall objects below the bumper, andmay not detect objects close to thebumper or on the ground.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to therear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate mea-surement of obstacles or false alarms.

The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver ofobstacles near the rear bumper when theshift lever is in R (Reverse). The system maynot detect objects at speeds above 3 mph(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu-lar or moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 feet(1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a de-creased coverage area at the outer cor-ners of the bumper (refer to the illustrationfor approximate zone coverage areas). Asyou move closer to the obstacle, the rate ofthe tone increases. When the obstacle isless than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tonewill sound continuously. If the RSS detects astationary or receding object further than

10 inches (25.0 cm) from the side of thevehicle, the tone will sound for only 3 sec-onds. Once the system detects an objectapproaching, the tone will sound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when theshift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and theignition is on. The RSS OFF switch on theinstrument panel allows the driver to turnthe RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, theignition must be on, and the shift lever in R(Reverse). An indicator light on the switchwill illuminate when the system is turnedoff. If the indicator light illuminates whenthe RSS is not turned off, it may indicate amalfunction in the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rearbumper fascia) free from snow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt (do not cleanthe sensors with sharp objects). If the sen-sors are covered, it will affect the accuracyof the RSS.

WARNING∙ Always turn and look back before

backing up. The rear sonar system isnot a substitute for proper backingprocedures.

∙ Always look around before proceed-ing. The front sonar system is nota substitute for proper drivingprocedures.

Rear SensorLSD0095

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


∙ Read and understand the limitationsof the front and rear sonar system ascontained in this section. Inclementweather may affect the function ofthe sonar system; this may includereduced performance or a falseactivation.

∙ This system is not designed to pre-vent contact with small or movingobjects.

∙ The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in detecting large station-ary objects to help avoid damagingthe vehicle. The system will not detectsmall objects below the bumper, andmay not detect objects close to thebumper or on the ground.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to thefront bumper fascia or the rear bum-per fascia, leaving it misaligned orbent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement ofobstacles or false alarms.

The rear sonar system sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the rearbumper. The rear sonar system automati-cally turns on when the shift lever is placedin R (Reverse) and the ignition is in the ONposition. The system may not detect ob-jects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) andmay not detect certain angular or movingobjects.

The rear sonar system detects obstaclesup to 5.9 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumperwith a decreased coverage area at theouter corners of the bumper. As you movecloser to the obstacle, the rate of the toneincreases. When the obstacle is less than10 in (25 cm) away, the tone will sound con-

tinuously. If it detects a stationary or reced-ing object further than 10 in (25 cm) fromthe side of the vehicle, the tone will soundfor only 3 seconds. Once the system de-tects an object approaching, the tone willsound again.

The front sonar system sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the frontbumper. The front sonar system automati-cally turns on when the shift lever is placedin a forward gear and the ignition switch isin the ON position. The system may notdetect objects at speeds above 3 mph(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu-lar or moving objects.

The front sonar system detects obstaclesup to 3 ft (1 m) from the front bumper with adecreased coverage area at the outer cor-ners of the bumper. As you move closer tothe obstacle, the rate of the tone increases.When the obstacle is less than 10 in (25 cm)away, the tone will sound continuously. If itdetects a stationary or receding object fur-ther than 10 in (25 cm) from the side of thevehicle, the tone will sound for only 3 sec-onds. Once the system detects an objectapproaching, the tone will sound again.

Front SensorLSD0202


The front and rear sonar system OFFswitch on the instrument panel allows thedriver to turn the sonar system on and off.To turn the system off, the ignition must beon and the shift lever in R (Reverse) or D(Drive). An indicator light on the switch willilluminate when the system is turned off. Ifthe indicator light illuminates when thesystem is not turned off, it may indicate afailure in the sonar system.

Keep the front and rear sonar sensors (lo-cated on the bumper fascia) free fromsnow, ice and large accumulations of dirt(do not clean the sensors with sharp ob-jects). If the sensors are covered, it will af-fect the accuracy of the sonar system.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer through the key hole. If the lockbecomes frozen, heat the key before in-serting it into the key hole or use the re-mote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped).

ANTIFREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),check the antifreeze to assure proper win-ter protection. For additional information,refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, thebattery fluid may freeze and damage thebattery. To maintain maximum efficiency,the battery should be checked regularly.For additional information, refer to “Battery”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATERIf the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-ing the engine block. Refill before operatingthe vehicle. For additional information, referto “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performanceof these tires will be substantially re-duced in snowy and icy conditions. Ifyou operate your vehicle on snowy oricy roads, NISSAN recommends the useof MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRESon all four wheels. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tiretype, size, speed rating and availabilityinformation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some U.S. states and Canadian prov-inces prohibit their use. Check local,state and provincial laws before install-ing studded tires.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additionalinformation, refer to “Tire chains” in the“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENTIt is recommended that the following itemsbe carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-move ice and snow from the windowsand wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed underthe jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” un-der these conditions. Try to avoid driv-ing on wet ice until the road is saltedor sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive withcaution. Accelerate and slow downwith care. If accelerating or down-shifting too fast, the drive wheels willlose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake while onthe ice, and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)Engine block heaters are used to assistwith cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)or lower.

WARNING∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can beseriously injured by an electricalshock if you use an ungroundedconnection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.


∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-prongedextension cord rated for at least 10 A.Plug the extension cord into a GroundFault Interrupt (GFI) protected,grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure touse the proper extension cord or agrounded outlet can result in a fire orelectrical shock and cause seriouspersonal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engineblock heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord intoa grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a GroundFault Interrupt (GFI) protected,grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must beplugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-pending on outside temperatures, toproperly warm the engine coolant. Usean appropriate timer to turn the engineblock heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug andproperly store the cord to keep it awayfrom moving parts.


6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuckvehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-ers while moving on the highway un-less unusual circumstances force youto drive so slowly that your vehiclemight become a hazard to othertraffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignitionswitch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the useof the hazard warning flasher switchwhile driving.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-tors tire pressure of all tires except thespare. When the low tire pressure warninglight is lit, and the TIRE PRES warning ap-pears in the trip computer, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated.Press the INFO knob on the instrumentpanel located behind the steering wheelfor information about location(s) and pres-sure(s) of the under-inflated tire(s). If thevehicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure, TPMS will activate and warn you of itby the low tire pressure warning light. Thissystem will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).For additional information, refer to “Warn-ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency



∙ If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-ing with under-inflated tires may per-manently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury.Check the tire pressure for all fourtires. Adjust the tire pressure to therecommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light OFF. If the light stillilluminates while driving after adjust-ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible, If no tireis flat and all tires are properly in-flated, have the vehicle checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service

∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMSsuch as the spare tire, the TPMS willnot function and the low tire pressurewarning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute. The light will remainon after 1 minute. Have your tires re-placed and/or TPMS system reset assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer forthese services.


∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIf you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow:

Stopping the vehicle1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Move the shift lever to P(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other trafficand to signal professional road assis-tance personnel that you need assis-tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-3

WARNING∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the shift lever isshifted into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming trafficis close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-fessional road assistance.

A. Tire stoppersB. Flat Tire

Blocking wheelsPlace tire stoppers, supplied in tool kit, atboth the front and back of the wheel diago-nally opposite the flat tire to prevent thevehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNINGBe sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and toolsThe jack and tool kit are located behind therear passenger side access cover. To re-move the jack and tool kit perform the fol-lowing:

1. Remove the access cover �1 .

LCE2142 LCE2032


2. To easily access removing the jack, firstremove the tool kit by unscrewing theretainer �2 counterclockwise.

3. Remove the tool bag.

4. To release the jack, lower the jack byturning the jack lever �3 counterclock-wise until the lock rod �4 can be low-ered.

5. Lift the jack to remove.

6. Assemble the extension and theJ-shaped end tool together before in-serting them into the oval-shapedopening above the middle of the rearstep bumper. Pass the J-shaped end ofthe jack rod through the opening anddirect it toward the spare tire winch,located directly above the spare tire.

CAUTIONDo not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

LCE2030 LCE2031 LCE2033


7. Fit the square end of the jack rod intothe square hole of the wheel nutwrench to form a handle.

8. Seat the J-shaped end of the jack rodinto the opening of the tire winch. Applypressure to keep the jack rod engagedin the spare tire winch and turn the jackrod counterclockwise to lower thespare tire.

9. Once the spare tire is completely low-ered, reach under the vehicle, removethe retainer chain, and carefully slidethe tire from under the rear of the ve-hicle. Do not remove the rubber spacer.

10. To reinstall the wheel, insert the tirechain through the wheel. Be sure therubber spacer is centered on the wheelbefore lifting. Use the assembled jackrod and slowly rotate the winch clock-wise to raise the wheel to the vehicle.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years andreplace as necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for re-placement parts if necessary.

CAUTION∙ Be sure to center the spare tire sus-

pending plate on the wheel and thenlift the spare tire.

∙ Failure to use the spacer may allowthe chain to get stuck on the wheelnut holes.

LCE2034 LCE2017


Removing bolt-on wheel caps

CAUTIONDo not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so couldresult in personal injury.

The wheel cap �1 is only attached with thewheel nuts and is separate from the wheel�2 .

To remove the wheel cap, remove thewheel nuts after the jack is securely sup-porting the vehicle and the tire clears theground.

For additional information, refer to “Jackingup vehicle and removing the damaged tire”in this section.

Take care not to scratch the wheel cap orwheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removingthe damaged tire

WARNING∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicle onother vehicles. The jack is designedfor lifting only your vehicle during atire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle forjack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine whilethe vehicle is on the jack. It may causethe vehicle to move.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)off the ground. It may cause the ve-hicle to move.

Always refer to the illustration for the cor-rect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following in-structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or twoturns by turning counterclockwise withthe wheel nut wrench. Do not removethe wheel nuts until the tire is off theground.

LCE2297


2. Place the jack directly under thejack-up point so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-uppoint. The jack-up points are indicatedby stamped arrows on the side of theframe or the rear.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. Install the assembled jacking rod intothe jack.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jacklever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicleuntil the tire clears the ground.

LCE2026 LCE2008


5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-move the tire.

Installing the spare tireThe spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. For additional information, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on andtighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tightenwheel nuts alternately and evenly in thesequence illustrated (�1 , �2 , �3 , �4 , �5 ,�6 , �7 , �8 ) until they are tight .

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence illus-trated (�1 , �2 , �3 , �4 , �5 , �6 , �7 , �8 ).Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause thenuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

LCE2012


The wheel nuts must be kept tightenedto specification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication inter-val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for 3 hours or more or driven lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display (if so equipped)of the tire pressure information mayshow higher pressure than the COLD tirepressure after the vehicle has beendriven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This isbecause the tire pressure increases asthe tire temperature rises. This does notindicate a system malfunction.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

WARNING∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properlysecured after use. Such items can be-come dangerous projectiles in an ac-cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. For additional information,refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster, theinstructions and precautions below mustbe followed.

WARNING∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resultingin severe injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is acorrosive sulfuric acid solution whichcan cause severe burns. If the fluidshould come into contact with any-thing, immediately flush the con-tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING


∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eye protec-tors (for example, goggles or indus-trial safety spectacles) and removerings, metal bands, or any other jew-elry. Do not lean over the batterywhen jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and causeserious injury.

∙ The automatic engine cooling fan (ifso equipped) may come on at anytime without warning, even if the igni-tion switch is in the OFF position andthe engine is not running. To avoid in-jury, keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

WARNINGAlways follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damageto the charging system and cause per-sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle, position the two vehicles to bringtheir batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles totouch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shiftlever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-sary electrical systems (lights, heater,air conditioner, etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level andtight.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the se-quence illustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

LCE2223


CAUTION∙ Always connect positive (�) to posi-

tive (�) and negative (�) to bodyground (for example, strut mountingbolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not tothe battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that the cableclamps do not contact any othermetal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicleand let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the boostervehicle at about 2,000 rpm and startthe engine of the vehicle being jumpstarted.

CAUTIONDo not keep the starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If the enginedoes not start right away, place the ig-nition switch in the OFF position andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-connect the negative cable and thenthe positive cable.

WARNINGDo not push start this vehicle. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

CAUTIONAutomatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. At-tempting to do so may cause transmis-sion damage.

WARNING∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant res-ervoir cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

∙ Overheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especiallycareful when driving. If the vehiclecannot maintain a safe driving speed,pull to the side of the road in a safearea. Allow the engine to cool and re-turn to normal operation.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated byan extremely high temperature gaugereading) or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc., take thefollowing steps.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-ply the parking brake and move theshift lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air condi-tioner temperature control to maxi-mum hot and fan control to highspeed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listenfor steam or coolant escaping from theradiator before opening the hood. Ifsteam or coolant is escaping, turn offthe engine. Do not open the hood fur-ther until no steam or coolant can beseen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNINGIf steam or water is coming from theengine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damageor looseness. Also check if the coolingfan is running. The radiator hoses andradiator should not leak water. If cool-ant is leaking, the water pump belt ismissing or loose, or the cooling fandoes not run, stop the engine.

WARNINGBe careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts orthe engine cooling fan. The engine cool-ing fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check thecoolant level in the engine coolant res-ervoir tank with the engine running.Add coolant to the engine coolant res-ervoir tank if necessary. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions areavailable from a NISSAN dealer. Local ser-vice operators are generally familiar withthe applicable laws and procedures fortowing. To assure proper towing and toprevent accidental damage to your vehicle,NISSAN recommends having a service op-erator tow your vehicle. It is advisable tohave the service operator carefully read thefollowing precautions:

WARNING∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after ithas been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering systemand powertrain are in working condi-tion. If any of these conditions apply,dollies or a flatbed tow truck must beused.

∙ Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends towing your vehiclebased upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-tional information, refer to the diagrams inthis section to ensure that your vehicle isproperly towed.

Two-Wheel Drive models withautomatic transmissionNISSAN recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels off theground or place the vehicle on a flatbedtruck as illustrated.

LCE2383


CAUTION∙ Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damageto the transmission. If it is necessaryto tow the vehicle with the frontwheels raised always use towing dol-lies under the rear wheels.

∙ When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition, and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by plac-ing the ignition switch in the LOCKposition. This may damage thesteering lock mechanism (formodels with a steering lockmechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing astuck vehicle)

WARNINGTo avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-tached only to main structural mem-bers of the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs totow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery devicestraight out from the front of the ve-hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle exceptthe attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use a tow strap or other devicedesigned specifically for vehicle recovery.Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system .

2. Make sure the area in front and behindthe vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left toclear an area around the front tires.


4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-verse) and D (Drive).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after afew tries, contact a professional towingservice to remove the vehicle.


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Cleaning the seat latch mountinglocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Environmental factors influence therate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

In order to maintain the appearance ofyour vehicle, it is important to take propercare of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, birddroppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park ina shady area or protect the vehicle with abody cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing thebody cover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap orgeneral purpose dishwashing liquid mixedwith clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-pecially brushless ones, use someacid for cleaning. The acid may reactwith some plastic vehicle compo-nents, causing them to crack. Thiscould affect their appearance, andalso could cause them not to functionproperly. Always check with your carwash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical de-tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight or while the vehicle body ishot, as the surface may becomewater-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty ofclean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.Take care that the drain holes in the loweredge of the door are open. Spray waterunder the body and in the wheel wells toloosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry thevehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.Polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosingthe proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions sup-plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as possiblefrom the surface of the paint to avoid last-ing damage or staining. Special cleaningproducts are available at a NISSAN dealeror any automotive accessory store. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these products.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, itis necessary to clean the underbody regu-larly in order to prevent dirt and salt frombuilding up and causing the acceleration ofcorrosion on the underbody and suspen-sion. Before the winter period and again inthe spring, the underseal must be checkedand, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-mal for glass to become coated with a filmafter the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easilyremove this film.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the inside of the win-dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,abrasive cleaners or chlorine-baseddisinfectant cleaners. They could dam-age the electrical conductors, radioantenna elements or rear window de-froster elements.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with anon-abrasive chrome polish to maintainthe finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use oftire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply acoating to the tires to help reduce discolor-ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-ing and form a compound. This compoundmay come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. Thecoating on the tire dissolves more easilythan with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be diffi-cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing iscompletely removed from the tiretread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufac-turer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats using avacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipethe vinyl and leather surfaces (if soequipped) with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe cleanwith a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required inorder to maintain the appearance of theleather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read themanufacturer’s recommendations. Somefabric protectors contain chemicals thatmay stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water toclean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasiveand damaging to leather surfacesand should be removed promptly. Donot use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,detergents or ammonia-based clean-ers as they may damage the leather’snatural finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unlessrecommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERSMost air fresheners use a solvent thatcould affect the vehicle interior. If you usean air freshener, take the following precau-tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can causepermanent discoloration when theycontact vehicle interior surfaces. Placethe air freshener in a location that al-lows it to hang free and not contact aninterior surface.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clipon the vents. These products can causeimmediate damage and discolorationwhen spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-er’s instructions before using the air fresh-eners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNINGTo avoid potential pedal interferencethat may result in a collision, injury ordeath:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver front po-sition or install them upside down orbackwards.

LAI0009

CLEANING INTERIOR


∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-cifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in thefloorwell using the floor mat position-ing hook. For additional information,refer to "Floor mat installation" in thissection.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats tomake sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,check the floor mats to make surethey are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet andmake it easier to clean the interior. Matsshould be maintained with regular clean-ing and replaced if they become exces-sively worn.

Floor mat installationYour vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for eachseating position varies depending on thevehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,follow the installation instructions providedwith the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, theshift lever in P (Park) position and withthe parking brake fully applied, positionthe floor mat in the floorwell so that thefloor mat grommet holes are alignedwith the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into thehook(s) and ensure that the floor mat isproperly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-fere with pedal operation. With the igni-tion still in the OFF position, the shiftlever in the P (Park) position and withthe parking brake applied, fully applyand release all pedals. The floor matmust not interfere with pedal opera-tion or prevent the pedal from return-ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for details about installing the floormats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of thefloor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely in the shade before using them. Foradditional information, refer to “Seat beltmaintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”section of this manual.

Positioning hooksLAI2052


WARNINGDo not allow wet seat belts to roll up inthe retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seatbelts, since these materials may se-verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT LATCHMOUNTING LOCATIONS

CAUTIONPeriodically clean the seat latch mount-ing locations to prevent reduction oflatching ability of the seat.

The mounting locations for the seatsshould be cleaned periodically with a high-powered vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debrismay reduce the latching ability of the seat.A wet cleansing agent may be used if nec-essary, but the mounting locations mustbe thoroughly dried.

Use a cloth wrapped around a screwdriver(or similar object) to clean the mountinglocations, if needed.

Do not apply any type of lubricant to themounting locations.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSIONMost vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panelsections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSIONMoistureAccumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially those ar-eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollutionexists and road salt is used.

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate ofcorrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt inthe air in coastal areas, or heavy road saltuse accelerates the corrosion process.Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often tokeep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumula-tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulationof sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash withwater as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION


CAUTION∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-ment by washing it out with a hose.Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner orbroom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic com-ponents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor panand fenders.

In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, it is recommended that you consulta NISSAN dealer.


MEMO


8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

5-speed Automatic Transmission(if so equipped) Fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-137-speed Automatic Transmission(if so equipped) Fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

When performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injury toyourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-lowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the ve-hicle from moving. Move the shift le-ver to P (Park).

∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans,belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jew-elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, evenif the ignition key is in the OFF positionand the engine is not running. Toavoid injury, always disconnect thenegative battery cable before work-ing near the fan.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced. Itis recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oiland coolant. Improperly disposed en-gine oil, engine coolant and/or othervehicle fluids can damage the envi-ronment. Always conform to localregulations for disposal of vehiclefluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-mission related component harnessconnector disconnected while the ig-nition switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-tery or any transistorized componentwhile the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

∙ DO NOT power wash any interior por-tion of this vehicle to help minimizeliquid intrusion and potential elec-tronic component damage.

This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instruc-tions regarding only those items which arerelatively easy for an owner to perform.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is alsoavailable. For additional information, referto “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, andcould affect warranty coverage. If in doubtabout any servicing, it is recommendedthat you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself 8-3

VQ40DE engine1. Fuse/Fusible link box2. Engine oil filler cap3. Engine oil dipstick4. Brake fluid reservoir5. Air cleaner6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir7. Engine coolant reservoir8. Drive belt location9. Power steering fluid reservoir10. Battery11. Radiator cap12. Fuse/Relay box

LDI3335

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS

8-4 Do-it-yourself

VK56VD engine1. Radiator cap2. Fuse/Fusible link box3. Engine oil dipstick4. Engine oil filler cap5. Brake fluid reservoir6. Air cleaner7. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir8. Engine coolant reservoir9. Drive belt location10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Battery12. Fuse/Relay box

LDI3329

Do-it-yourself 8-5

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provideyear-round antifreeze and coolant protec-tion. The antifreeze solution contains rustand corrosion inhibitors. Additional enginecooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. For additional informa-tion on precautions, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a GenuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additivesmay clog the cooling system andcause damage to the engine, trans-mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protec-tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additionalfreeze protection is needed due toweather where you operate your ve-hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-trate following the directions on thecontainer. If an equivalent coolantother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-low the coolant manufacturer’s in-structions to maintain minimum anti-freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). Theuse of other types of coolant solu-tions other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent may damage the enginecooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)or 7 years. Mixing any other type ofcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),including Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water will reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. For additional information, referto the "Maintenance and schedules"section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoirwhen the engine is cold. If the coolantlevel is below the MIN level �B , add coolantto the MAX level �A . If the reservoir is empty,check the coolant level in the radiatorwhen the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAXlevel �A .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixingany other type of coolant or the use ofnon-distilled water will reduce the life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-nance and schedules" section of thismanual.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, it is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information on the locationof the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-gine compartment check locations” in thissection.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the enginecoolant. The service procedure can befound in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine over-heating.

WARNING∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when theengine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator or enginecoolant reservoir cap when the en-gine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escap-ing from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2823

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until itreaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than10 minutes for the oil to drain backinto the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between the H(High) and L (Low) marks �B . This is thenormal operating oil level range. If theoil level is below the L (Low) mark �A ,remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-ommended oil through the opening.Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the sever-ity of operating conditions.

VQ40DE engineLDI2616

VK56VD engineLDI2956 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL

8-8 Do-it-yourself

CAUTIONOil level should be checked regularly.Operating the engine with an insuffi-cient amount of oil can damage the en-gine, and such damage is not coveredby warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OILFILTERFor additional information on engine oiland oil filter change, refer to the instruc-tions outlined in this section.

Vehicle set-up1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 min-utes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using asuitable floor jack and safety jackstands.

∙ Place the safety jack stands under thevehicle jack-up points.

∙ A suitable adapter should be attachedto the jack stand saddle.

CAUTIONMake sure the correct lifting and sup-port points are used to avoid vehicledamage.

�1 Oil filler cap VQ40DELDI3359

Do-it-yourself 8-9

�1 Oil filler cap VK56VDLDI3425

�2 Oil drain plugLDI3426

�3 Oil filter VQ40DELDI3431

8-10 Do-it-yourself

Removal of under-engineprotectors

1. Remove bolts �A and skid plate.

Engine oil and filter1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug and oil filter.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrenchby turning it counterclockwise andcompletely drain the oil.

�3 Oil filter VK56VDLDI3442

�4 Skid plateLDI3428 LDI3071

Do-it-yourself 8-11

CAUTIONBe careful not to burn yourself, as theengine oil is hot.

WARNING∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skincancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise.Remove the oil filter by turning it byhand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-face with a clean rag.

CAUTIONBe sure to remove any old gasket mate-rial remaining on the sealing surface ofthe engine. Failure to do so could lead toan oil leak and engine damage.

∙ The dipstick must be inserted in placeto prevent oil spillage from the dip-stick hole when filling the engine withoil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until aslight resistance is felt, then tighten ad-ditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:11 to 15 ft-lb (15.0 to 21.0 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug witha new washer. Securely tighten thedrain plug with a wrench. Do not useexcessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)

9. Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil through the oil filler open-ing, and install the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information about drain andrefill capacity, refer to “Recommendedfluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Tech-nical and consumer information” section ofthis manual. The drain and refill capacity de-pends on the oil temperature and drain time.Use these specifications for reference only.Always use the dipstick to determine theproper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the drain plug and the oil filter.Correct as required. Turn the engine offand wait more than 15 minutes. Checkthe oil level with the dipstick. Add en-gine oil if necessary.

After the operation1. Reinstall skid plate in reverse order of

removal.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to theground.

3. Reset engine oil and oil filter mainte-nance reminder. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Meters and gauges” inthe “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

∙ Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

∙ Check your local regulations.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

When checking or replacement is required,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION∙ Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is notavailable, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFmay also be used.

∙ Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic SATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterio-ration in driveability and automatictransmission durability, and maydamage the automatic transmission,which is not covered by the NISSANNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluidis also described on caution labels locatedin the engine compartment.

When checking or replacement is required,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix withother fluids.

∙ Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-mission fluid in this transmission.Damage caused by the use of fluidsother than as recommended is notcovered under NISSAN’s New VehicleLimited Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent toGenuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may alsodamage the transmission. Damagecaused by the use of fluids other thanas recommended is not covered un-der NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluidis also described on caution labels locatedin the engine compartment.

The fluid level should be checked using theHOT MAX range on the power steering fluidreservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° -176°F (50° - 80°C) or using the COLD MAXrange on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, addGenuine NISSAN PSF-II to HOT MAX or COLDMAX depending on system fluid temperature.Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.∙ Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

LDI2597

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION (if so equipped)FLUID (ATF)

7-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION (if so equipped)FLUID (ATF)

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

Do-it-yourself 8-13

WARNING∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect thevehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and shouldbe stored carefully in marked contain-ers out of reach of children.

CAUTIONDo not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluidis spilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If thebrake fluid is below the MIN line �B , thebrake warning light will illuminate. Addbrake fluid up to the MAX line �A . For addi-tional information on brake fluid type, referto “Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,the brake system should be thoroughlychecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIRFill the windshield-washer fluid reservoirperiodically. Add windshield-washer fluidwhen the low windshield-washer fluidwarning light (if so equipped) comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,lift the cap off the reservoir and pour thewindshield-washer fluid into the reservoiropening.

LDI2824 LDI2599

BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-14 Do-it-yourself

Add a washer solvent to the washer forbetter cleaning. In the winter season, add awindshield-washer antifreeze. Follow themanufacturer’s instructions for the mix-ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently whendriving conditions require an increasedamount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSANWindshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to thepaint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methylalcohol based washer fluid concen-trates may permanently stain thegrille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrateswith water to the manufacturer’s rec-ommended levels before pouring thefluid into the windshield-washer fluidreservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix thewasher fluid concentrate and water.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bak-ing soda and water.

∙ Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-tive (-) battery terminal cable to preventdischarge.

NOTE:


1. Installation or extended use of elec-tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.


BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-15

WARNING∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-drogen gas generated by the batteryis explosive. Explosive gases cancause blindness or injury. Do not allowbattery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-furic acid can cause blindness or in-jury. After touching a battery or bat-tery cap, do not touch or rub youreyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. Ifthe acid contacts your eyes, skin orclothing, immediately flush with wa-ter for at least 15 minutes and seekmedical attention.

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluidin the battery is low. Low battery fluidcan cause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectionand remove all jewelry.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands afterhandling.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-driver as shown. Use a cloth to protectthe battery case.

WDI0224

8-16 Do-it-yourself

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only dis-tilled water to bring the level up to thebottom of the filler opening. Do notoverfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jumpstarting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-tion of this manual. If the engine does notstart by jump starting, the battery mayhave to be replaced. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley2. Automatic drive belt tensioner

pulley3. Idler pulley4. Cooling fan pulley5. Air conditioner compressor pulley6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator pulley

WDI0529

VQ40DEWDI0674

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 8-17

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley2. Automatic drive belt tensioner

pulley3. Water pump pulley4. Cooling fan pulley5. Air conditioner compressor pulley6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator pulley

WARNINGBe sure the ignition switch is in theOFF or LOCK position before servicingdrive belt. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. Ifthe belt is in poor condition or is loose,have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly forcondition and tension in accordancewith the maintenance schedule foundin the "Maintenance and schedules"section of this manual.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGSIridium-tipped spark plugsIt is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped �A spark plugs as frequently as con-ventional type spark plugs because theylast much longer. Follow the maintenancelog shown in the “Maintenance and sched-ules” section of this manual. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning orregapping.

∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

VK56VDWDI0661 SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

8-18 Do-it-yourself

WARNINGBe sure the engine and ignition switchare off and that the parking brake isengaged securely.

CAUTIONBe sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrectsocket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleanedand reused. Replace it according to themaintenance log shown in the “Mainte-nance and schedules" section of thismanual.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

�1 Unlatch the clips and move the aircleaner cover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filterhousing and the cover with a dampcloth.

VQ40DELDI3066

VK56VDLDI3067

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-19

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter,make sure the air cleaner cover is seatedin the housing and latch the clips.

WARNING∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops theflame if the engine backfires. If it isn’tthere, and the engine backfires, youcould be burned. Do not drive with theair cleaner removed, and be carefulwhen working on the engine with theair cleaner removed.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine withthe air cleaner removed. Doing socould result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if soequipped)The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entryof airborne dust and pollen particles andreduces some objectionable outsideodors. The filter is located behind the glovebox. For additional information, refer to the"Maintenance and schedules" section forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the followingprocedure:

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the seven screws indicatedabove.

LDI2080

8-20 Do-it-yourself

3. Gently release the two tabs to removethe filter cover.

4. Remove the old filter.

5. Insert the new filter into the housing.

6. Replace the filter cover.

7. Reinstall the screws and close the glovebox door.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield-washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other mate-rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-tergent. Then rinse the blades with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades.

CAUTIONWorn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

REPLACINGReplace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

�2 Push the release tab, then move thewiper blade down the wiper arm to re-move.

�3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto thewiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is inthe groove.

LDI2618 WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

6. Return the wiper to its original positionand release it until it has made contactwith the windshield.

CAUTION∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged whenthe hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contactthe glass; otherwise the arms may bedamaged from wind pressure.

Be careful not to let anything get into thewasher nozzle �A . This may cause cloggingor improper windshield washer operation.If something gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin �B .

If the brakes do not operate properly, havethe brakes checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

Self-adjusting brakesYour vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-plied.

WARNINGHave your brake system checked if thebrake pedal height does not return tonormal. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicatorsThe disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, a high pitchedscraping or screeching sound will be heardwhen the vehicle is in motion. The noise willbe heard whether or not the brake pedal isdepressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

LDI2187

BRAKES

8-22 Do-it-yourself

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops is nor-mal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information re-garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-propriate maintenance schedule informa-tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"section of this manual.

Two types of fuses are used. Type �A andType �B (if so equipped) are used in the fuseboxes in the engine compartment. Type �Bcannot be used to replace Type �A in theunderhood fuse boxes.

Type �B is used in the passenger compart-ment fuse box.

Type �A fuses are provided as spare fuses.They are stored in the passenger compart-ment fuse box.

Type �A fuses can be installed in the enginecompartment and passenger compart-ment fuse boxes.

If a type �A fuse is used to replace a type �Bfuse, the type �A fuse will not be level withthe fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.This will not affect the performance of thefuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in thefuse box securely.

LDI0455 LDI0457

FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-23

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNINGNever use a fuse of higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or electronic controlunits or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not comeon, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and theheadlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushingthe tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.The fuse puller is located in the centerof the fuse block in the passengercompartment.

5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anew fuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-trical system checked and repaired. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

VQ40DE engineLDI3334

VK56VD engineLDI3058 LDI2826

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition, checkthe fusible links. If any of these fusible linksare melted, replace with only GenuineNISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNINGNever use a fuse of higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or electronic controlunits or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and theheadlight switch are in the OFF posi-tion.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

LDI0456 LDI2828

Do-it-yourself 8-25

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller�A .

4. If the fuse is open �B , replace it with anequivalent good fuse �C .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-trical system checked and repaired. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Extended storage switchIf any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, remove the extended storage switchand check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used forlong term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-tended storage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replace only theopen fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

LDI2827 LDI2760 LDI2761

8-26 Do-it-yourself

How to replace the extended storageswitch:

1. To remove the extended storageswitch, be sure the ignition switch is inthe OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in theOFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs �A found oneach side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight outfrom the fuse box �B .

CAUTIONBe careful not to allow children to swal-low the battery or removed parts.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-27

KEY FOBReplace the battery in the key fob as follows:

�1 Open the lid using a coin �A .

�2 Remove the battery �B .

�3 Install a new battery �C with the “+” fac-ing down.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact pointswill seriously deplete the storage ca-pacity.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit andelectric terminals as it could cause amalfunction.

∙ When changing the battery, do not letdust or oil get on the key fob.

∙ There is danger of explosion if a lithiumbattery is incorrectly replaced. Replaceonly with the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent.

�4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, thenthe button two or three times tocheck the key fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

∙ An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always con-firm local regulations for battery dis-posal.

∙ The key fob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

LDI2026

8-28 Do-it-yourself

∙ The operational range of the key fobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

Note:


For Canada:This devise complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

HEADLIGHTSFor additional information on headlightbulb replacement, refer to the instructionsoutlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlightbulbThe headlight is a semi-sealed beam typewhich uses a replaceable headlight (halo-gen) bulb. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

If the vehicle is equipped with aftermarketaccessories, it may be necessary to re-aimthe head lamps. For additional information,refer to NISSAN NV2500/3500 Body Build-ers Guide for aiming instructions. An elec-tronic copy of the NISSAN NV2500/3500Body Builders Guide is available at ww-w.nissancommercialvehicles.com or it isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

∙ DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may en-ter the headlight body and affect theperformance of the headlight.

∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-ing the bulb. When aiming is neces-sary, it is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses the fog. This is not a malfunction. Iflarge drops of water collect inside the lens,It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

LIGHTS

Do-it-yourself 8-29

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)For additional information on fog light bulbreplacement, refer to the instructions out-lined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed as shown in thechart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the foglight for a long period of time as dust,moisture and smoke may enter thefog light body and affect the perfor-mance of the fog light.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) batterycable.

2. The fog light is accessible in front of thefront tire and behind the bumper.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector �1 .

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise andremove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of thefog light assembly. Do not shake or ro-tate the bulb when removing it. Do nottouch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

LDI2082

8-30 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSItem Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly*High/Low/Daytime running light 60/55 H13Park/Turn 27/7 3157AKSide marker 3.8 194

Fog lights (if so equipped) 55 H11Map light* 8 —Interior lights (rear) (if so equipped)* 8 —Cargo light* 10 —Step lights (if so equipped) 3.4 158High-mounted stop light* 18 921Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 27/8 3157KBackup (reversing) 18 921Turn 27 3156AK

License plate light* 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-tion.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

1. Map light2. Step light (if so equipped)3. Cargo light4. High-mounted stop light5. Rear combination light6. License plate light7. Interior lights (rear) (if so equipped)8. Headlight assembly9. Fog lights (if so equipped)

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D.When replacing a bulb, first remove thelens, lamp and/or cover.

LDI2612

WDI0263

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installation

Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.Step lights (if so equipped)

LDI0341

Rear combination lightLDI2029

Do-it-yourself 8-33

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” inthe “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

TIRE PRESSURETire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

WARNINGRadio waves could adversely af-fect electric medical equipment.Those who use a pacemakershould contact the electric medi-cal equipment manufacturer forthe possible influences beforeuse.This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS).It monitors tire pressure of all fourtires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, andthe TIRE PRES warning appears inthe trip computer, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this systemmay not detect a sudden drop in tirepressure (for example a flat tire whiledriving).

For additional information, refer to“Low tire pressure warning light” inthe “Instruments and controls” sec-tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section and “Flat tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section of thismanual.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressures (includingthe spare) often and always prior tolong distance trips. The recom-mended tire pressure specificationsare shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label or the Tire andLoading Information label under the“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tireand Loading Information label is af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checkedregularly because:∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-jects or if the vehicle strikes acurb while parking.

The tire pressures should bechecked when the tires are cold. Thetires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Incorrect tire pressure, includingunder inflation, may adversely af-fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause anaccident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weightcapacity is indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.Do not load your vehicle beyondthis capacity. Overloading yourvehicle may result in reducedtire life, unsafe operating condi-tions due to premature tire fail-ure, or unfavorable handlingcharacteristics and could alsolead to a serious accident. Load-ing beyond the specified capac-ity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressuregauge to ensure that the tirepressures are at the specifiedlevel.

∙ For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “Impor-tant Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

Tire and Loading Informationlabel

�1 Seating capacity: The maximumnumber of occupants that canbe seated in the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: Refer to load-ing information in the “Technicaland consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

�3 Original tire size: The size of thetires originally installed on thevehicle at the factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate thetires to this pressure when thetires are cold. Tires are consid-ered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)at moderate speeds. The rec-ommended cold tire inflation isset by the manufacturer to pro-vide the best balance of tirewear, vehicle handling, driveabil-ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-cle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” inthis section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI2007

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not presstoo hard or force the valve stemsideways, or air will escape. If thehissing sound of air escaping fromthe tire is heard while checking thepressure, reposition the gauge toeliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on thegauge stem and compare to thespecification shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. Iftoo much air is added, press thecore of the valve stem brieflywith the tip of the gauge stem torelease pressure. Recheck thepressure and add or release airas needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

Front OriginalTire:LT245/70R17

350kPa, 50 PSI

Rear OriginalTire:LT245/70R17

550 kPa, 80 PSI

Spare Tire:LT245/70R17 550 kPa, 80 PSI

TIRE LABELINGFederal law requires tire manufac-turers to place standardized infor-mation on the sidewall of all tires.This information identifies and de-scribes the fundamental character-istics of the tire and also provides theTire Identification Number (TIN) forsafety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

LDI0393Example

WDI0394

Do-it-yourself 8-37

�1 Tire size (example: LT215/65R1595H)

1. LT: The “LT” indicates the tire isdesigned for light truck vehicles(not all tires have this informa-tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in milli-meters of the tire from sidewalledge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): Thisnumber, known as the aspectratio, gives the tire’s ratio ofheight to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameterin inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):This number is the tire’s load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port. You may not find this infor-mation on all tires because it isnot required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You shouldnot drive the vehicle faster thanthe tire speed rating.

ExampleLDI2043

8-38 Do-it-yourself

�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)for a new tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-partment Of Transportation”.The symbol can be placedabove, below or to the left orright of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.For example, the numbers 3103means the 31st week of 2003. Ifthese numbers are missing thenlook on the other sidewall of thetire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure.

�5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle, al-ways use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates whether the tire requiresan inner tube (“tube type”) or not(“tubeless”).

ExampleLDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-39

�7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown if the tirehas radial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or brand name isshown.Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms thatare defined throughout this section,Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or modelname molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding onthe other sidewall of the tire, or (2)the outward facing sidewall of anasymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that must always face out-ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with informationabout tire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factoryequipped tires, and may not matchthe potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximumspeed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could affectthe proper operation of the low tirepressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels. Failure todo so may result in a circumferencedifference between tires on the frontand rear axles which can cause theVehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) systemto malfunction resulting in personalinjury or death, excessive tire wearand may damage the transmissionand differential gears.

∙ For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

All season tiresNISSAN specifies All Season tires on somemodels to provide good performance allyear, including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All Season tires are identified by ALLSEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.Snow tires have better snow traction thanAll Season tires and may be more appropri-ate in some areas.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

Summer tiresNISSAN specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowyor icy conditions, NISSAN recommends theuse of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on allfour wheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load rat-ing to the original equipment tires. If you donot, it can adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-ings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be thesame size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibittheir use. Check local, state and provinciallaws before installing studded tires. Skidand traction capabilities of studded snowtires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorerthan that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When installingtire chains, make sure they are the propersize for the tires on your vehicle and areinstalled according to the chain manufac-turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of awinter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are de-termined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recommendedby the tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damageto the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingtire chains. In addition, drive at a reducedspeed. Otherwise, your vehicle may bedamaged and/or vehicle handling andperformance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Drivingwith chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRESTire rotationNISSAN recommends rotating thetires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

For additional information on the tirereplacing procedures, refer to “Flattire” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times.It is recommended that wheel nutsbe tightened to specification ateach tire rotation interval.

Because the tire pressures are dif-ferent between the front and reartires, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) must be reset aftertire rotation. For additional informa-tion, refer to “TPMS sensor reset” inthis section.

WARNING∙ After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


WDI0258

8-42 Do-it-yourself

TPMS sensor resetAfter rotating the tires, the TPMS sensorposition needs to be relearned. Contactthe closest NISSAN dealer or follow thesteps below.

1. After rotating the tires, adjust the tirepressure as shown above. Decrease airpressure for at least 30 seconds con-tinuously for each tire (more than 10 psi(69 kPa) within 30 seconds) to place theTPMS system into relearn mode for30 minutes.

2. On the meter, start the relearn proce-dure using the INFO knob as fol-lows:SETTINGS →TPMS Menu → RE-LEARN→ CONFIRM

The TPMS warning light flashescontinuously when the system is re-learning the tire positions.

3. When the relearn procedure is suc-cessfully completed:

– The TPMS light illuminates for3 seconds

– A chime sounds three times

4. Adjust the tire pressures to the cold tirepressure specification shown on theTire and Loading Information label. Foradditional information, refer to “Check-ing tire pressure” in this section and“Tire and Loading Information label” inthe “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– If the tires pressures are correct, theTPMS light turns off.

– If the tires are not inflated to the cor-rect cold tire pressure, the TPMSwarning light illuminates. Recheckthe tire pressures and adjust as nec-essary.

If the relearn procedure does not work,check the following and retry the pro-cess:

∙ If the relearn procedure is stopped be-fore completion, the new tire positionsare not learned. Redo the complete re-learn procedure to reset the tire posi-tions.

∙ You must select “RESET TPMS → RE-LEARN” from the “SETTINGS” menu tocomplete the relearn procedure. Redothe complete relearn procedure to re-set the tire positions. Select the TPMSresetting menu, then continue the re-maining registration procedure.

∙ Adjust the tire pressures to the relearnpressures before selecting the TPMS re-setting menu on the display. Redo thecomplete relearn procedure to resetthe tire positions.

LDI2046

Do-it-yourself 8-43

∙ If the tire pressure cannot be reduced atleast 10 psi (69 kPa) to adjust them tothe relearn pressures, inflate the tires toat least 10 psi (69 kPa) above the speci-fied pressures. Redo the complete re-learn procedure starting with step 1.

∙ Devices which emit electronic interfer-ence should be turned off before start-ing the relearn procedure. The interfer-ence may prevent the system fromlearning the new tire positions. Turn offor remove sources of electrical interfer-ence. If necessary, move the vehicle toanother location, then redo the com-plete relearn procedure to reset the tirepositions.

∙ If you have retried the procedure sev-eral times and the relearn procedure isnot successfully completed, It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

∙ Use an air pump that is capable of in-flating the tires to the required pressurespecifications. The air pump must becapable of inflating a tire at least 10 psi(69 kPa) in 30 seconds.

∙ If the reset TPMS function is uninten-tionally selected, place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position then to theON position to end the relearn proce-dure.

∙ If the vehicle is not recognizing the newtire pressure levels, move the vehicleforward 40 in (1 m). Place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position then to theON position. Redo the relearn proce-dure beginning at step 1. Make sure thatthe tire pressures are increased or de-creased at least 10 psi (69 kPa).

∙ When vehicle is in the relearn mode, theTPMS will not warn of low tire pressuresor detect malfunctions.

∙ If tire pressure is not set to the correctpressure, restart the procedure again.

Tire wear and damage1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,bulging or objects caught in thetread. If excessive wear, cracks,bulging or deep cuts are found,the tire(s) should be replaced.

WDI0259

8-44 Do-it-yourself

∙ The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not beobvious. Replace the tires asnecessary to prevent tire failureand possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the sparetire may result in serious per-sonal injury. If it is necessary torepair the spare tire, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


Replacing wheels and tiresWhen replacing a tire, use the same size,tread design, speed rating and load carry-ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

WARNING∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tiresof different brands, construction(bias, bias-belted or radial), or treadpatterns can adversely affect the ride,braking, handling, Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tirechain clearance, speedometer cali-bration, headlight aim and bumperheight. Some of these effects maylead to accidents and could result inserious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originallyequipped with four tires that were thesame size and you are only replacingtwo of the four tires, install the newtires on the rear axle. Placing new tireson the front axle may cause loss ofvehicle control in some driving condi-tions and cause an accident and per-sonal injury.

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimen-sion. Wheels of a different off-setcould cause premature tire wear, de-grade vehicle handling characteris-tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-terference with the brake discs. Suchinterference can lead to decreasedbraking efficiency and/or early brakepad wear. For additional informationon wheel off-set dimensions, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Do-it-yourself 8-45

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tire pres-sure warning light will flash for ap-proximately 1 minute. The light will re-main on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.


∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged ifit is not handled correctly. Be carefulwhen handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, theID registration may be required. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for ID registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is notspecified by NISSAN. The valve stemcap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps arecorrectly fitted. Otherwise the valvemay be clogged up with dirt andcause a malfunction or loss ofpressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires couldhave structural damage and could failwithout warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

∙ For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

∙ For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Care of wheels∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels whenthe wheel is changed or the undersideof the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dentsor corrosion. Such damage may causeloss of pressure or poor seal at the tirebead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt inareas where it is used during winter.

8-46 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Explanation of general maintenanceitems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-6Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Additional Maintenance Items forsevere operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Maintenance under severe operatingconditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your vehiclegood mechanical condition, as well as itsemissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make surethat the scheduled maintenance, as well asgeneral maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receivesproper maintenance. You are a vital link inthe maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCEGeneral maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation. They are essentialfor proper vehicle operation. It is your re-sponsibility to perform these proceduresregularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checksrequires minimal mechanical skill and onlya few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be doneby yourself, a qualified technician or, if youprefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEThe maintenance items listed in this sec-tion are required to be serviced at regularintervals. However under severe drivingconditions, additional or more frequentmaintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICEIf maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-cialists and are kept up-to-date with thelatest service information through techni-cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-grams. They are completely qualified towork on NISSAN vehicles before work be-gins.

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it isrecommended that you ask your NISSANdealer where the nearest NISSAN CertifiedCollision Center is located, or go tohttp://collision.nissanusa.com.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-er’s service department can perform theservice needed to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smells, be sure tocheck for the cause or have it checkedpromptly. In addition, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer if you thinkthat repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMSAdditional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that thedoors and engine hood operate properly.Also ensure that all latches lock securely.Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollersand links if necessary. Make sure that the

secondary latch keeps the hood fromopening when the primary latch is re-leased.

When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights, stoplights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and otherlights are all operating properly and in-stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts aremissing, and check for any loose wheelnuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-ery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in alltires, including the spare, to the pressurespecified. Check carefully for damage, cutsor excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components: Replace theTPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve coreand cap when the tires are replaced due towear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-hicle should pull to either side while drivingon a straight and level road, or if you detectuneven or abnormal tire wear, there maybe a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-way speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield at leastevery six months for cracks or other dam-age. Have a damaged windshield repairedby a qualified repair facility. It is recom-mended that you have a damaged wind-shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or aNISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locatea collision center in your area, refer tohttp://collision.nissanusa.com.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Inside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing scheduled maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure the pedaldoes not catch or require uneven effort.Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-nism: On a fairly steep hill check that thevehicle is held securely with the shift leverin the P (Park) position without applying anybrakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smoothoperation. If the brake pedal suddenly goesdown further than normal, the pedal feelsspongy or the vehicle seems to take longerto stop, have your vehicle checked imme-diately. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service. Keep thefloor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brakeoperation regularly. The vehicle should besecurely held on a fairly steep hill with onlythe parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Seats: Check seat position controls suchas seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., toensure they operate smoothly and alllatches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints/headrestsmove up and down smoothly and the locks(if so equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (for example, buckles, anchors,adjusters and retractors) operate properlyand smoothly, and are installed securely.Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operatingproperly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properlyand in sufficient quantity when operatingthe heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Checkthat the wipers and washer operate prop-erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (for example, eachtime you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.The fluid should be at the bottom of thefiller opening. Vehicles operated in hightemperatures or under severe conditionsrequire frequent checks of the battery fluidlevel.

NOTE:


1. Installation or extended use of elec-tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.



Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MAX and MIN lineson the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drivebelts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level spot andturning off the engine. Wait more than15 minutes for the oil to drain back into theoil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If thesound of the exhaust seems unusual orthere is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-ately have the exhaust system inspected. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after thevehicle has been parked for a while. Waterdripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or iffuel fumes are evident, check for the causeand have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold, withthe engine off. Check the lines for properattachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects,leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to control dust. Itis very important to remove these sub-stances, otherwise rust may form on thefloor pan, frame, fuel lines and around theexhaust system. At the end of winter, theunderbody should be thoroughly flushedwith plain water, being careful to cleanthose areas where mud and dirt may accu-mulate. For additional information, refer tothe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided togive you a better understanding of thescheduled maintenance items that shouldbe regularly checked or replaced. Themaintenance schedule indicates at whichmileage/time intervals each item requiresservice.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,your vehicle requires that some items bechecked during normal day-to-day opera-tion. For additional information, refer to“General maintenance” in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommendedby NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.You are not required to perform mainte-nance on these items in order to maintainthe warranties which come with yourNISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-tervals are required.

When applicable, additional informationcan be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE ITEMS


NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use ofnon-OEM approved aftermarket flush-ing systems and strongly advisesagainst performing these services on aNISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-proved chemicals or solvents, the use ofwhich has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMMAINTENANCE:Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts forwear, fraying or cracking and for propertension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-vals. When driving for prolonged periods industy conditions, check/replace the filtermore frequently.

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at thespecified interval. When adding or replac-ing coolant, be sure to use only GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (Foradditional information on the proper mix-ture for your area, refer to “Engine coolingsystem” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual.)

NOTE:

Mixing any other type of coolant or theuse of non-distilled water may reducethe recommended service interval of thecoolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oiland oil filter at the specified intervals. Forrecommended oil grade and viscosity referto “Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

Evaporative emissions control vaporlines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-ness. Tighten connections or replace partsas necessary.

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, pipingand connections for leaks, looseness, ordeterioration. Tighten connections or re-place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.Install new plugs of the same type as origi-nally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODYMAINTENANCE:Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect forproper installation. Check for chafing,cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.Replace any deteriorated or damagedparts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace anydeteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped): Re-place at specified intervals. When drivingfor prolonged periods in dusty conditions,replace the filter more frequently

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-pension parts, drive shaft boots: Checkfor damage, looseness, and leakage of oilor grease. Under severe driving conditions,inspect more frequently.


Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km) according to the in-structions under “Explanation of generalmaintenance items” in this section. Whenrotating tires, check for damage and un-even wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: Vi-sually inspect for signs of leakage at speci-fied intervals.

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-nance schedules that may be used, de-pending upon the conditions in which youusually drive. These schedules containboth distance and time intervals, up to120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. Formost people, the odometer reading will in-dicate when service is needed. However, ifyou drive very little, your vehicle should beserviced at the regular time intervalsshown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at thesame mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMSFOR SEVERE OPERATINGCONDITIONSAdditional maintenance items for severeoperating conditions should be per-formed on vehicles that are driven underespecially demanding conditions. Addi-tional maintenance items should be per-formed if you primarily operate your vehicleunder the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-ing for long distances, such as police,taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spreadroads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or usinga car-top carrier.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


The following tables show the standardmaintenance schedule. Depending uponweather and atmospheric conditions, vary-ing road surfaces, individual driving habitsand vehicle usage, additional or more fre-quent maintenance may be required. After120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months,continue maintenance at the samemileage/time interval.STANDARD MAINTENANCEAbbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, L = Lubricate or replace as necessary.

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONPerform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL7.5(12)6

15(24)12

22.5(36)18

30(48)24

37.5(60)30

45(72)36

52.5(84)42

60(96)48

67.5(108)

54

75(120)60

82.5(132)66

90(144)

72

97.5(156)78

105(168)84

112.5(180)

90

120(192)96

Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R RAutomatic transmission fluid NOTE (2)Brake fluid� R R R RBrake lines and cables I I I I I I I IBrake pads & rotors� I I I I I I I IDifferential gear oil NOTE (3) I I I I I I I IDrive belts NOTE (4) I* I* I* I* I*Engine coolant* NOTE (5)(6)Engine oil & oil filter� R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R REVAP vapor lines & Fuel lines I* I* I* I*Exhaust system� I I I IFuel filter NOTE (2)In-cabin microfilter R R R R R R R RIntake & exhaust valve clearance* NOTE (7)Propeller shaft� I I I I I I I ISpark plugs NOTE (8) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts� I I I ISteering stopper cap� L L L LTire rotation NOTE (9)

STANDARD MAINTENANCE


NOTE:

Maintenance items “�” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.(2) Periodic maintenance is not required.(3) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil every20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.(4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts iffound damaged.(5) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles(120,000 km) or 60 months.(6) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancyof the factory fill coolant.(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.(8) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.049 in (1.25 mm) enen if within specified replacement mileage.(9) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in the section

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not performsuch maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items andintervals are required.


The maintenance intervals shown on thepreceding pages are for normal operatingconditions. If the vehicle is mainly operatedunder severe driving conditions as shownbelow, more frequent maintenance mustbe performed on the following items asshown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-ing for long distance, such as police, taxior door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spreadroads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or acar-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, Lubricate = Lubricate or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance intervalBrake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 monthsBrake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsEngine & oil filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsExhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsPropeller shaft Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsSteering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsSteering stopper cap Lubricate Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVEREOPERATING CONDITIONS


7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6MonthsDealer Name:Date:Mileage:DealerStamp:









MAINTENANCE LOG









Miles ( km) orMonths

Dealer Name:Date:Mileage:DealerStamp:




10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine oil and oil filterrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

When traveling or registering in anothercountry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-12Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Flat towing for rear wheel drive vehicle . . . . . 10-30

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetric

MeasureUS

MeasureImperialMeasure

Fuel 105.8 L 28 gal 23-1/4 gal • For additional information refer to “Fuel recommendation” inthis section.

Engine oil*1Drain and refill*1: For addi-tionalinformation,refer to “Engineoil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” sec-tion of thismanual.

VQ40DE

With oil filterchange 5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt

• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN” (or equivalent) isrecommended.• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a syntheticSAE 5W-30 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used.Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) otherthan as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s NewVehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to“Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in this section.

Without oilfilter change 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt

VK56VD

With oil filterchange 6.5 L 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt

• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20” (or equivalent) isrecommended.• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damagecaused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than asrecommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New VehicleLimited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “Engine oiland oil filter recommendation” in this section.

Without oilfilter change 6.2 L 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt

Engine coolantwith reservoir 12.7 L 3-3/8 gal 2-3/4 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetric

MeasureUS

MeasureImperialMeasure

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)

5AT — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF inNISSAN automatic transmissions. If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATFis not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalentto Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFmay damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused bythe use of fluids other than as recommended is not coveredunder the NISSAN’S New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

7AT — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF ONLYin NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids.Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic SATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage causedby the use of fluids other than as recommended is not coveredunder the NISSAN’S New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Differential gear oil 2.6 L 5-1/2 pt 4-5/8 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5 synthetic75W-90 or equivalent.

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

Brake fluid — — —• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalentDOT 3*2: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —• HFC-134a (R-134a)• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specificationlabel” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (KLH00-PAGS0) orequivalent• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONUse unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number91).

CAUTION∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel systemor other damage can occur if E-85 isused in vehicles that are not designedto run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designed torun on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 orE-85 fuel in a vehicle not specificallydesigned for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-versely affect the emission controldevices and systems of the vehicle.Damage caused by such fuel is notcovered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Usingfuel containing MMT may adverselyaffect vehicle performance and ve-hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-tent, so you may have to consult yourgasoline retailer for more details.Note that Federal and California lawsprohibit the use of MMT in reformu-lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbre-viation or the appropriate percentagefor that region.

Gasoline specificationsNISSAN recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)specifications where it is available. Many ofthe automobile manufacturers developedthis specification to improve emission con-trol system and vehicle performance. Askyour service station manager if the gaso-line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing re-formulated gasolines. These gasolines arespecially designed to reduce vehicle emis-sions. NISSAN supports efforts towardscleaner air and suggests that you use re-formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MethylTert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol withor without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use offuels of which the oxygenate content andthe fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-not be readily determined. If in doubt, askyour service station manager.


If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.

∙ The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙ If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

∙ E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affectthe emission control devices and sys-tems of the vehicle and should not beused. Damage caused by such fuel isnot covered by the NISSAN New Ve-hicle Limited Warranty.

∙ If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitableamount of appropriate cosolventsand corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-erly formulated with appropriate co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors,such methanol blends may cause fuelsystem damage and/or vehicle per-formance problems. At this time, suf-ficient data is not available to ensurethat all methanol blends are suitablefor use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as enginestalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,immediately change to a non-oxygenatefuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenatescan cause paint damage.

E–15 fuelE-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.E-15 can only be used in vehicles designedto run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in yourvehicle. U.S. government regulations re-quire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be

identified with small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbreviationor the appropriate percentage for that re-gion.

E–85 fuelE-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.E-85 can only be used in a Flexible FuelVehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-hicle. U.S. government regulations requirefuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange and blacklabel with the common abbreviation or theappropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMTMMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-ditive. NISSAN does not recommend theuse of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel mayadversely affect vehicle performance, in-cluding the emissions control system. Notethat while some fuel pumps label MMTcontent, not all do, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer for more de-tails.


Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-ample, fuel injector cleaner, octanebooster, intake valve deposit removers,etc.) which are sold commercially. Many ofthese additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active sol-vents or similar ingredients that can beharmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended cancause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”(“Spark knock” is a metallic rappingnoise.) If severe, this can lead to enginedamage. If you detect a persistent heavyspark knock even when using gasolineof the stated octane rating, or if you hearsteady spark knock while holding asteady speed on level roads, it is recom-mended that you have a NISSAN dealercorrect the condition. Failure to correctthe condition is misuse of the vehicle, forwhich NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result inspark knock, after-run and/or overheating,which may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or engine damage. If any of the abovesymptoms are encountered, have your ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is nota cause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONSSelecting the correct oilIt is essential to choose the correct grade,quality and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance.For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”in this section. NISSAN recommends theuse of an energy conserving oil in order toimprove fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-cation or International Lubricant Standard-ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)certification and SAE viscosity standard.These oils have the API certification markon the front of the container. Oils which donot have the specified quality label shouldnot be used as they could cause enginedamage.

Oil additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important to select the engine oilviscosity based on the temperatures atwhich the vehicle will be operated beforethe next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-ity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. Whenreplacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter orits equivalent for the reason described in“Change intervals.”

LTI2303


Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Using en-gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-fied quality, or exceeding recommended oiland filter change intervals could reduceengine life. Damage to the engine causedby improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity isnot covered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality en-gine oil when it was built. You do not have tochange the oil before the first recom-mended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how you useyour vehicle.

Operation under the following conditionsmay require more frequent oil and filterchanges:

∙ repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ towing a trailer

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the“Maintenance and schedules” section ofthis manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in yourNISSAN vehicle must be charged with therefrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) andNISSAN A/C system oil Type S (KLH00-PAGSO) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTIONThe use of any other refrigerant or oilwill cause severe damage to the air con-ditioning system and will require the re-placement of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerant doesnot affect the earth’s atmosphere, certaingovernment regulations require the recov-ery and recycling of any refrigerant duringautomotive air conditioner system service.A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-cians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system re-frigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer when servicing your air conditionersystem.


ENGINE

Model VQ40DE VK56VD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.76 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92) in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)Displacement cu in (cm3) 241.3 (3,954) cu in (cm3) 338.8 (5,553)Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary. No adjustment is necessary.A/T (in “N” position)Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idle

Spark plug DILFR5A-11 DIKAR7B11Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chainThis spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRESWheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel 1.57 (40) 17 x 7.5 JTires Size

All Season LT245/70R17Spare tire Size

Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSUnit: in (mm)

Overall length 240.6 (6,112)Overall width without mirrors 79.9 (2,030)

with non-extended towmirrors

102.8 (2,610)

with extended tow mir-rors

108.6 (2,758)

Overall height 84.0 (2,133)Front Track 68.7 (1,745)Rear Track 68.9 (1,750)Wheelbase 146.1 (3,710)Gross vehicle weightrating

lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification la-bel” on the driv-er’s side centerpillar.

Gross axle weight ratingFront lbs. (kg)Rear lbs. (kg)


When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should firstfind out if the fuel available is suitable foryour vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is toolow may cause engine damage. All gaso-line vehicles must be operated with un-leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid takingyour vehicle to areas where appropriatefuel is not available.

When transferring the registration ofyour vehicle to another country, state,province or district, it may be necessaryto modify the vehicle to meet local lawsand regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standardsvary according to the country, state, prov-ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation and registration are the re-sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-sponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)plate is attached as shown. This number isthe identification for your vehicle and isused in the vehicle registration.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine asshown.

LTI2050VQ40DE engine

LTI0127

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGIN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATIONLABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-cation label is affixed as shown. This labelcontains valuable vehicle information, suchas: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year ofmanufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label isattached to the underside of the hood asshown.

VK56VD engineWTI0095 WTI0172 LTI2003


TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. The label islocated as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is af-fixed to the underside of the hood asshown.

Use the following steps to mount the frontlicense plate:

1. Hold license plate holder �1 againstbumper.

2. Line up holes in bumper with licenseplate holder holes and insert the plas-tic clips �2 .

3. Secure the license plate holder usingtwo M6-25mm screws �3 .

License plate screw tighteningtorque:

0.73 lbs.-ft(1N·m)

LTI0197 LTI2004 LTI2008

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


WARNING∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-hicle. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely tobe seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride inany area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andseat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMSIt is important to familiarize yourselfwith the following terms beforeloading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight ofyour vehicle) - vehicle weight in-cluding: standard and optionalequipment, fluids, emergencytools, and spare tire assembly.This weight does not includepassengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weightof passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other op-tional equipment. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limitspecified for the front or rear axle.This information is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum totalweight rating of the vehicle, pas-sengers, cargo, and trailer.

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Loadlimit, Total load capacity - maxi-mum total weight limit specifiedof the load (passengers andcargo) for the vehicle. This is themaximum combined weight ofoccupants and cargo that can beloaded into the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load.This information is located on theTire and Loading Information la-bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissibleweight of cargo, the subtractedweight of occupants from theload limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITYBefore driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both theGVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.For additional information, refer to“Measurement of weights” in thissection.Do not exceed the load limit of yourvehicle shown as “The combinedweight of occupants and cargo” onthe Tire and Loading Information la-bel. Do not exceed the number ofoccupants shown as “Seating Ca-pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.To get “the combined weight of oc-cupants and cargo”, add the weightof all occupants, then add the totalluggage weight. Examples areshown in the following illustration.

ExampleLTI2320


Steps for determining correctload limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXlbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information la-bel.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengersthat will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For ex-ample, if the XXX amount equals1,400 lbs. and there will be five150 lbs. passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggageload capacity calculated instep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to deter-mine how this reduces the avail-able cargo and luggage load ca-pacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed theGVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.For additional information, refer to“Measurement of weights” in thissection.Also check tires for proper inflationpressures. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-mation label” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual.

LOADING TIPS∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

∙ Do not load the front and rearaxle to the GAWR. Doing so willexceed the GVWR.

WARNING∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help preventit from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rearGAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould result in loss of controland cause personal injury.


∙ Overloading and improperloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longerbraking distances. This maycause a premature tire failurewhich could result in a seriousaccident and personal injury.Failures caused by overloadingare not covered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTSSecure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of your vehicle. When the ve-hicle is loaded, drive to a scale andweigh the front and the rear wheelsseparately to determine axle loads.Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the Gross Axle WeightRatings (GAWR). The total of the axleloads should not exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Theseratings are given on the vehicle cer-

tification label. If weight ratings areexceeded, move or remove items tobring all weights below the ratings.

WARNINGOverloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (805 km).Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not makestarts at full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of your vehiclewear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be usedprimarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-member that towing a trailer places addi-tional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) isavailable on the website atwww.nissanusa.com. This guide includesinformation on trailer towing capability andthe special equipment required for propertowing.

TOWING A TRAILER


MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceedthe value specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailerweight plus its cargo weight.

∙ When towing a trailer load of3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailerswith a brake system MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR should not exceedthe value specified in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight ofthe towing vehicle (including passengersand cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-ing loads greater than these or using im-proper towing equipment could adverselyaffect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer isnot only related to the maximum trailerloads, but also the places you plan to tow.Tow weights appropriate for level highwaydriving may have to be reduced for lowtraction situations (for example, on slipperyboat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affecttowing. For example, towing a heavy trailerin high outside temperatures on gradedroads can affect engine performance andcause overheating. The engine protectionmode, which helps reduce the chance ofengine damage, could activate and auto-matically decrease engine power. Vehiclespeed may decrease under high load. Planyour trip carefully to account for trailer andvehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNINGOverheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase the chanceof a collision. Be especially careful whendriving. If the vehicle cannot maintain asafe driving speed, pull to the side of theroad in a safe area. Allow the engine tocool and return to normal operation. Foradditional information, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

LTI2025


CAUTIONVehicle damage resulting from im-proper towing procedures is not cov-ered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weightdistributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or usethe trailer tongue load specified by thetrailer manufacturer. The tongue loadmust be within the maximum tongue loadlimits shown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the tongueload becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross AxleWeight (GAW)The GVW of the towing vehicle must notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label. The GVW equals thecombined weight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongueload and any other optional equipment. Inaddition, front or rear GAW must not ex-ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label.

WTI0160 LTI2026


Towing capacities are calculated assum-ing a base vehicle with driver and any op-tions required to achieve the rating. Addi-tional passengers, cargo and/or optionalequipment, such as the trailer hitch, willadd weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity andtrailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighedto confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-sured using platform type scales com-monly found at truck stops, highway weighstations, building supply centers or salvageyards.

To determine the available payload capac-ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-ing procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with allof the passengers and cargo that arenormally in the vehicle when towing atrailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight fromthe GVWR. The remaining amount isthe available maximum tongue/kingpin load.

To determine the available towing capacity,use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the"Towing Load/Specification" chartfound in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weightfrom the GCWR. The remaining amountis the available maximum towing ca-pacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-ment and cargo, that are normally in thetrailer when it is towed. Make sure theGross trailer weight is not more than theGross Trailer Weight Rating shown on thetrailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on thescale to make sure the Front Gross AxleWeight and Rear Gross Axle Weight arenot more than Front Gross Axle Weightand Rear Gross Axle Weight on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. Thecargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the speci-fied ratings.

Example:

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargoand hitch - 6,200 lbs. (2,812 kg).

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-bel - 7,100 lbs. (3,220 kg).

∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification" chart- 15,100 lbs. (6,848 kg).

∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from“Towing Load/Specification" chart -9,200 lbs. (4,173 kg).


7,100 lbs. (3,220 kg) GVWR– 6,200 lbs. (2,812 kg) GVW

= 900 lbs. (408 kg) Available for tongue/king pin weight

15,100 lbs. (6,848 kg) GCWR– 6,200 lbs. (2,812 kg) GVW

= 8,900 lbs. (4,036 kg) Capacity available fortowing

900 lbs. (408 kg) Available tongueweight

/ 8,900 lbs. (4,036 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be lessthan the maximum towing capacity due tothe passenger and cargo load in the ve-hicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weightbetween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight orwithin the trailer tongue load specificationrecommended by the trailer manufacturer.If the tongue load becomes excessive, re-arrange the cargo to obtain the propertongue load. Do not exceed the maximumtongue weight specification shown in the

“Towing Load/Specification” chart even ifthe calculated available tongue weight isgreater than 15%. If the calculated tongueweight is less than 10%, reduce the totaltrailer weight to match the availabletongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities arewithin the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNINGThe towing capacities provided in thismanual are for general reference only.The safe towing capacity of your vehicleis affected by dealer and factory in-stalled options and passenger andcargo loads. You must weigh the vehicleand trailer as described in this manualto determine the actual vehicle towingcapacity. Do not exceed the publishedmaximum towing capacity or the GCWRor the GVWR shown on theFMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-sult in an accident causing serious per-sonal injury or property damage.

NOTE:

The towing specifications are based on Sgrade models.VQ40DE - Bumper towing

Axle type 2WDMaximum Payload 2,800 lbs. (1,270 kg)Maximum Towing

Capacity *1, *2 2,000 lbs. (907 kg)

Maximum Tongueload *2 200 lbs. (91 kg)

Maximum Gross Com-bined Weight Rating 13,400 lbs. (6,078 kg)

VK56VD - Bumper towing


Capacity *1, *2 2,000 lbs. (907 kg)




VK56VD - Class IV hitch towing


Capacity *1, *2 8,700 lbs. (3,946 kg)



*1: The towing capacity values are calcu-lated assuming a base vehicle with driverand any options required to achieve therating. Additional passengers, cargoand/or optional equipment will add weightto the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’smaximum towing capacity.

*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch sys-tem is recommended when towing over5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitchYour vehicle may be equipped with an op-tional trailer tow package. The trailer towpackage includes a receiver-type framemounted hitch. This hitch is rated for themaximum towing capacity of this vehiclewhen the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount andhitch ball that is rated for the trailer to betowed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts andhitch balls are available from a NISSANdealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-tional trailer tow package, check the tow-ing capacity of your bumper hitch orreceiver-type frame mounted hitch.Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch isavailable from a NISSAN dealer. Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to thevehicle to help avoid personal injury orproperty damage due to sway caused bycrosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-ing trucks.

WARNINGTrailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier thanthe weight rating of the hitch compo-nents. Never exceed the weight ratingof the hitch components. Doing so cancause serious personal injury or prop-erty damage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size andweight rating for your trailer:

∙ The required hitch ball size is stampedon most trailer couplers. Most hitchballs also have the size printed on thetop of the ball.

∙ Choose the proper class hitch ballbased on the trailer weight.

∙ The diameter of the threaded shank ofthe hitch ball must be matched to theball mount hole diameter. The hitch ballshank should be no more than 1/16”smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ballmust be long enough to be properlysecured to the ball mount. There shouldbe at least 2 threads showing beyondthe lock washer and nut.

Ball mountThe hitch ball is attached to the ball mountand the ball mount is inserted into thehitch receiver. Choose a proper class ballmount based on the trailer weight. Addi-tionally, the ball mount should be chosen tokeep the trailer tongue level with theground.


Bumper towingThe Genuine NISSAN step bumper has pro-visions to install a trailer hitch ball and isdesigned to tow trailers of a maximumweight of 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).

To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circlein the center of the step bumper �A , thenremove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitchesA weight carrying or “dead weight” ballmount is one that is designed to carry thewhole amount of tongue weight and grossweight directly on the ball mount and onthe receiver.

Weight distribution hitchThis type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of barsattach to the ball mount and to the trailerto distribute the tongue weight (hitchweight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’tcarry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongueweight transferred through the frame andpushing down on the front wheels. Thisgives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (ClassIV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towingequipment manufacturers to determine ifthey recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system mayaffect the operation of trailer surgebrakes. If you are considering use of aweight-distributing hitch system with asurge brake-equipped trailer, check withthe surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-turer to determine if and how this can bedone.

Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using theweight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-face. With the ignition on and the doorsclosed, allow the vehicle to stand forseveral minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference pointon the front and rear bumpers at thecenter of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-just the hitch equalizers so that thefront bumper height is within 0 -.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the referenceheight measured in step 2. The rearbumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.

LTI2007


WARNINGProperly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. Ifthe rear bumper is higher than the mea-sured reference height when loaded,the vehicle may handle unpredictablywhich could cause a loss of vehicle con-trol and cause serious personal injury orproperty damage.

Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-feting caused by other vehicles can affecttrailer handling. Sway control devices maybe used to help control these affects. If youchoose to use one, contact a reputabletrailer hitch supplier to make sure the swaycontrol device will work with the vehicle,hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using thesway control device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to towtrailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.(907 kg).

Class II hitchClass II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).

Class III hitchClass III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitchClass IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributinghitch should be used to tow trailers thatweigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVtrailer hitch equipment that has a10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) maximum weight rat-ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-ing the maximum trailer weights shown inthe “Towing Load/Specification” chart inthis section.

Tire pressures∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recom-mended cold tire pressure indi-cated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-ing and proper inflation pressureshould be in accordance with thetrailer and tire manufacturer’sspecifications.

Safety chainsAlways use suitable safety chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. The safetychains should be crossed and should beattached to the hitch, not to the vehiclebumper or axle. The safety chains can beattached to the bumper if the hitch ball ismounted to the bumper. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turn-ing corners.


Trailer lights

CAUTIONWhen splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially availablepower-type module/converter must beused to provide power for all trailerlighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-tery as a direct power source for alltrailer lights while using the vehicletail light, stop light and turn signal cir-cuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15milliamps from the stop and tail lampcircuits. Using a module/converter thatexceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electricalsystem. See a reputable trailer retailerto obtain the proper equipment and tohave it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federaland/or local regulations. For assistance inhooking up trailer lights, it is recommendedthat you contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped withthe optional trailer tow package areequipped with a 7-pin trailer harness con-nector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed

to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.Adapters are available at auto parts storesand hitch retailers.

Trailer brakesWhen towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, moststates require a separate braking systemon trailers with a loaded weight above aspecific amount. Make sure the trailermeets the local regulations and the regu-lations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are avail-able.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-draulic line running to each trailer wheel.Surge brakes are activated by the trailerpushing against the hitch ball when thetow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surgebrakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system,there is no hydraulic or electric connectionfor brake operation between the tow ve-hicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric brakingsystems are activated by an electronic sig-nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe-cial brake-sensing module). For additionalinformation, refer to “Electric trailer brakecontroller” in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towingequipment make sure the trailer brakes areproperly installed and demonstrate properbrake function testing.

WARNINGNever connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.


Electric trailer brake controller(if so equipped)Trailers equipped with electric brakes mayrequire the installation of an aftermarkettrailer brake controller.

Your vehicle is equipped with a connectorand jumper harness (if so equipped) that isspecifically designed to be used when in-stalling an aftermarket brake controller.

To install the electric trailer brake controllerjumper harness, perform the following pro-cedure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat tothe rearmost position.

2. Locate the jumper harness connector�1 under the lower portion of the in-strument panel behind the parkingbrake. The connector is taped to thewiring harness.

3. Peel off the tape and connect thejumper harness to the connector �1 .

ExampleLTI0117 LTI2009


Wire color designation for electric trailerbrake controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTERED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp

switch to trailer brakecontroller.

BLACK Brake controllerground (-).

BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controllerswitched output.

RED/BLUE Trailer brake controllerillumination (not used).

RED Fused trailer brakecontroller battery feed(B+).

4. Install the aftermarket electric trailerbrake controller according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

Pre-towing tips∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or un-loaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive thevehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up ornose-down condition; check for im-proper tongue load, overload, worn sus-pension or other possible causes of ei-ther condition.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-vent load shift while driving.

∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possiblein the trailer to keep the trailer center ofgravity low.

∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%of the trailer load is in the front half and40% is in the back half. Also make surethe load is balanced side to side.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts everytime you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-form to all federal, state or local regula-tions. If not, install any mirrors requiredfor towing before driving the vehicle.

∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-hicle and trailer so the required clear-ance is known.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understandingof the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-tice turning, stopping and backing up in anarea which is free from traffic. Steering sta-bility and braking performance will besomewhat different than under normaldriving conditions.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-vent load shift while driving.

∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pinor lock to prevent the coupler from in-advertently becoming unlatched.

∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration orstops.

∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

∙ When backing up, hold the bottom ofthe steering wheel with one hand. Moveyour hand in the direction in which youwant the trailer to go. Make small cor-rections and back up slowly. If possible,have someone guide you when you arebacking up.


Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, if youmust do so:

CAUTIONIf you move the shift lever to the P (Park)position before blocking the wheelsand applying the parking brake, trans-mission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on thedownhill side of the vehicle and trailerwheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,slowly release the brake pedal until theblocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailerare clear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store theblocks.

∙ While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle maydecrease overall stability. Therefore, tomaintain adequate control, reduce yourspeed and shift to a lower gear. Avoidlong or repeated use of the brakeswhen descending a hill, as this reducestheir effectiveness and could causeoverheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-stead provides “engine braking” and re-duces the need to brake as frequently.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature risesto a high temperature, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this owner’smanual.

∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’sfirst 500 miles (805 km).

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that youdo tow, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h).

∙ Have your vehicle serviced more oftenthan at intervals specified in the recom-mended Maintenance Schedule in the“Maintenance and schedules” section ofthis manual.

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheelswill be closer to the inside of the turnthan your vehicle wheels. To compen-sate for this, make a larger than normalturning radius during the turn.

∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,possibly causing vehicle sway. Whenbeing passed by larger vehicles, be pre-pared for possible changes in cross-winds that could affect vehicle han-dling.

Do the following if the trailer begins tosway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedalto allow the vehicle to coast and steeras straight ahead as the road condi-tions allow. This combination will helpstabilize the vehicle.


– Do not correct trailer sway by steer-ing or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-ply the brakes and pull to the side of theroad in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it isbalanced. For additional information,refer to “Pre-towing tips” in this section.

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than nor-mal passing. Remember, the length ofthe trailer must also pass the other ve-hicle before you can safely changelanes.

∙ Downshift the transmission to a lowergear for engine braking when drivingdown steep or long hills. This will helpslow the vehicle without applying thebrakes.

∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat, resulting in re-duced braking efficiency.

∙ Increase your following distance to al-low for greater stopping distanceswhile towing a trailer. Anticipate stopsand brake gradually.

∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruisecontrol not be used while towing atrailer.

∙ Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for ve-hicles that are towing trailers. Obey thelocal speed limits.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harnessconnections, and trailer wheel lug nutsafter 50 miles (80 km) of travel and atevery break.

∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow thewater level to go over the exhaust tailpipe or rear bumper.

∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailerlights before backing the trailer into thewater or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, referto the “Do-it-yourself” section in thismanual.

Tow mode (if so equipped)Using tow mode is recommended whenpulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavyload. Press the TOW MODE switch to acti-

vate tow mode. The indicator light on theTOW MODE switch illuminates when towmode is selected. Press the TOW MODEswitch again to turn tow mode off. Towmode is automatically canceled when theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Tow mode includes the following features:

∙ Grade logic — Adjusts transmissionshifts when pulling a trailer or hauling aload up a grade.

∙ Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto-matically downshifts when drivingdown a grade with a trailer or heavyload to help control vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will notcause any damage. However, fueleconomy may be reduced and thetransmission/engine driving characteris-tics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, referto the “Maintenance and schedules” sec-tion of this manual.


FLAT TOWING FOR REAR WHEELDRIVE VEHICLETowing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground is sometimes called flat towing.This method is sometimes used whentowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ Never tow your rear wheel drive ve-hicle with the rear tires on the ground.Doing so may cause serious and ex-pensive damage to the powertrain.

∙ DO NOT tow your rear wheel drive ve-hicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmissionlubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-fer to “Towing recommended byNISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

Automatic transmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-hicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dollymanufacturer’s recommendations whenusing their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include ac-celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat, and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-cessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passengercar tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. GradesB and A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly in-flated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combi-nation, can cause heat build-up andpossible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-formation Booklet which comes with yourNISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, youmay obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-formation Booklet which comes with yourNISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, youmay obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY


For USAIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a collisionor could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-fying NISSAN.If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a re-call and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain other infor-mation about motor vehicle safetyfrom http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.For CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a collisionor could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifyingNISSAN.If Transport Canada receives com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayrequest that NISSAN conduct arecall campaign. However, TransportCanada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’sDefect Investigations and Recalls Divi-sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. Youmay also report safety defects onlineat: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) orhttps://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)Additional information concerningmotor vehicle safety may be obtainedfrom Transport Canada’s Road SafetyInformation Centre at 1-800-333-0371or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety(English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers).To notify NISSAN of any safety con-cerns please contact our ConsumerInformation Centre toll-free at 1-800-387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


Due to legal requirements in some statesand Canadian Provinces, your vehicle maybe required to be in what is called the“ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emissioncontrol system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the ready condition canbe obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-tion. Before taking the I/M test, check thevehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Place the ignitionswitch in the ON position without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) comes on steady for 20 secondsand then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M testcondition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-tion is “ready”. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purpose of anEDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, datathat will assist in understanding how a ve-hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-signed to record data related to vehicle dy-namics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehiclewere operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un-derstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR dataare recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g.name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash in-vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer and NISSANdealer, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, that have the special equipment, canread the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only beaccessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for thismodel year and prior can be purchased. AGenuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information foryour vehicle. This manual is the same oneused by the factory-trained techniciansworking at NISSAN dealerships. GenuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSANService Manual or Owner’s Manual, for thismodel year and prior, please contact yournearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in yourarea, call the NISSAN Information Center at1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


11 Index5-Speed automatic transmission fluid(ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-137-speed automatic transmission fluid (ATF)(gasoline engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

A

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact airbag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-22Air bag warning light,supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-22Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-19Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . .4-27, 4-33Air conditioner specification label . .10-13Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations . . . . . . .10-8Air conditioner system refrigerantrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24, 4-33Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-35Servicing air conditioner . . . . .4-29, 4-36

Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-25Anchor point locations. . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . .2-18Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-24Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-49Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . .4-69, 4-71Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . .4-71Compact disc (CD) player. . . . . . . .4-55FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45, 4-50FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37iPod® Player. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62, 4-65iPod® player operation . . . . . .4-62, 4-65Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Steering wheel audio controlswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60USB (Universal Serial Bus) ConnectionPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60

AutomaticAutomatic power window switch. . .2-50Automatic transmission positionindicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Driving with automatictransmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-17Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57

B

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32, 8-15

Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-19Battery replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 8-28Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69, 4-71Bluetooth® hands-free phone system

Bluetooth® connections . . . . . . . .4-92Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . .4-81Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80Text messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Systemwithout Navigation System . . . . . . . .4-76Bluetooth® streaming audio withNavigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-24

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-31Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-25, 8-22Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-18Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Brake Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Brightness/contrast button . . . . . .4-9, 4-15Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Cargo(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-14Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73CD player (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-55Check engine indicator light(See malfunction indicator lamp) . . . . .2-23Checking bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Child restraints. . . . . . . .1-29, 1-30, 1-32, 1-34

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Precautions on child

restraints . . . . . . . . .1-32, 1-40, 1-46, 1-52Top tether strap anchor pointlocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-37Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . . .3-8Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-25Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-13Clock setting (models with NavigationSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . .4-55Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-10

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Brightness/contrast button . . . .4-9, 4-15Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-10Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-13With navigation system. . . . . . .4-10, 4-11

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel) . . . . .4-73Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24, 4-33Rear seat air conditioner. . . . . . . . .4-35

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-7Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . .5-18, 5-18, 5-19Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47

Curtain side-impact and rollover airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63

D

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system. . .2-31Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-32Display controls(see control panel buttons). . . . . . .4-4, 4-10Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Drive belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-3

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Emission control information label . . . .10-12Emission control system warranty . . . .10-31Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-10Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-7

11-2

Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment checklocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-6Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil pressure gauge. . . . . . . . .2-7Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-19Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-5Engine oil pressure gauge. . . . . . . . . . .2-7Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-10Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-3Explanation of scheduled maintenanceitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .8-26Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-3

Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-14

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-61Front and rear sonar system. . . . .2-36, 5-30Front and rear sonar system OFFswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . .3-13Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-14

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

G

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Gauge

Automatic transmission fluidtemperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5Engine oil pressure gauge. . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

H

Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Heated seat switches. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24, 4-33Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-26, 4-34Rear seat air conditioner. . . . . . . . .4-35

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

11-3

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-10Important vehicle information label . . .10-12In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . .5-22Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . .3-17Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-32Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-32Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62, 4-65ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-17

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Key fob battery replacement . . . . .8-27, 8-28Keyless entry

Without Intelligent Key system(See remote keyless entry system). . .3-10

KeysNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . .10-13C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12Emission control information label . .10-12Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-66

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Launch bar menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-13Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-22Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-31Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-31Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Low tire pressure warning light. . . . .2-20Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

LockChild safety sliding door lock . . . . . . .3-8Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Low fuel warning light . . . . . .2-13, 2-20, 2-22Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-20Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Luggage(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-14

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-29Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4

Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Maintenance under severe operationconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) . . . . . .2-23Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3Manual vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

11-4

Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-32Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-17Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Mobile apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75

N

NissanConnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-10NISSAN Voice Recognition System . . . .4-105

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-46Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-12

Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-34Owner's manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-18Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-23

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-40Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-23Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-40Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Precautions

Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2Precautions on boosterseats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32, 1-40, 1-46, 1-52Precautions on childrestraints . . . . . . . . .1-32, 1-40, 1-46, 1-52Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-21Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-3

Programmable features . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-13Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-75FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45, 4-50Steering wheel audio controlswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33Rear seat air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-35Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . . . .2-36Rear Sonar System (RSS). . . . . . . . . . .5-29Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Recorders

Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33Refrigerant recommendation. . . . . . . .10-8Registering a vehicle in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Remote keyless entry system . . . . .3-9, 3-10Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-32Reset TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 8-43

S

SafetyChild safety sliding door lock . . . . . . .3-8Child seat belts . . . . .1-32, 1-40, 1-46, 1-52Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-32

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3

11-5

Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4Seat belt

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-30Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-21Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-29Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 7-5Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-28Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-25

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-24, 2-19Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Security system (NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-10Security systems

Vehicle security system . . . . . .2-25, 2-25Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-34Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . .4-29, 4-36Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-13Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-14Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-28Sliding door

Manual sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Sliding door locks

Child safety sliding door locks . . . . . .3-8Smartphone connectivity . . . . . . . . . .4-75

SonarRear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . .9-8, 9-8Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-10Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-17Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-3Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Steering

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-23Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-73Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Under seat storage tray . . . . . . . . .2-42Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-66Supplemental air bag warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-22

Supplemental front impact air bagsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-66Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-55Switch

Automatic power window switch . . .2-50Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-30Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-32Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-6Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . .2-35Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-36Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Steering wheel switch for audiocontrol/Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 5-10Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

11-6

Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2, 6-3Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-30Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-34, 10-10Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light. . . . .2-20

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 6-2Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-37Towing

2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-14Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-21Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37TMPS

Reset TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 8-43Transmission

Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Travel (See registering a vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Troubleshooting guide(NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . .4-109

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

U

Under seat storage tray . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-30USB interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60

Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port(models without Navigation System) . . .4-57

V

Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-27Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . .2-27, 5-10Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-14Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15Vehicle security system . . . . . . . .2-25, 2-25Vehicle security system (NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System), engine start . .2-27, 5-10Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . .4-79, 4-98Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-22Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-18Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-19Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-19Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-19Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-14Low fuel warning light . . . .2-13, 2-20, 2-22Low tire pressure warning light. . . . .2-20Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Passenger's seat belt warning light andchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-24, 2-19Supplemental air bag warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-22TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Vehicle security system . . . . . .2-25, 2-25Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-66

Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Checking bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

11-7

Weights(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-10Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34, 10-10Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10When traveling or registering in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-50Manual vent windows . . . . . . . . . .2-50Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Wiper

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28

11-8

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-dex) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel systemor other damage can occur if E-85 isused in a vehicle that is not designedto run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designed torun on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 orE-85 fuel in a vehicle not specificallydesigned for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-versely affect the emission controldevices and systems of the vehicle.Damage caused by such fuel is notcovered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Usingfuel containing MMT may adverselyaffect vehicle performance and ve-hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-tent, so you may have to consult yourgasoline retailer for more details.Note that Federal and California lawsprohibit the use of MMT in reformu-lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbre-viation or the appropriate percentagefor that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:Refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricantsand capacities” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:For additional information, refer to “Tire andLoading Information label” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section of thismanual.

The label is typically located on the driverside center pillar or on the driver’s door. Foradditional information, refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ofvehicle use, follow the break-in procedurerecommendations for the future reliabilityand economy of your new vehicle. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Break-inschedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in vehicledamage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

PF80-D

Printing : July 2019Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.OM20EA PF80U0

2020 Nissan NV Passenger Bus Owner's Manual and ...

Documents

Transcript of 2020 Nissan NV Passenger Bus Owner's Manual and ...